[go: up one dir, main page]

CN1306277C - Manipulator for a test head with active compliance - Google Patents

Manipulator for a test head with active compliance Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN1306277C
CN1306277C CNB018192637A CN01819263A CN1306277C CN 1306277 C CN1306277 C CN 1306277C CN B018192637 A CNB018192637 A CN B018192637A CN 01819263 A CN01819263 A CN 01819263A CN 1306277 C CN1306277 C CN 1306277C
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
force
load
test head
compliant
lock
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Fee Related
Application number
CNB018192637A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
CN1484767A (en
Inventor
尼尔·O·奈
亨利·M·阿库卡
阿利恩·R·霍尔特
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
InTest Corp
Original Assignee
InTest IP Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by InTest IP Corp filed Critical InTest IP Corp
Publication of CN1484767A publication Critical patent/CN1484767A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CN1306277C publication Critical patent/CN1306277C/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01RMEASURING ELECTRIC VARIABLES; MEASURING MAGNETIC VARIABLES
    • G01R1/00Details of instruments or arrangements of the types included in groups G01R5/00 - G01R13/00 and G01R31/00
    • G01R1/02General constructional details
    • G01R1/06Measuring leads; Measuring probes
    • G01R1/067Measuring probes
    • G01R1/073Multiple probes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01RMEASURING ELECTRIC VARIABLES; MEASURING MAGNETIC VARIABLES
    • G01R31/00Arrangements for testing electric properties; Arrangements for locating electric faults; Arrangements for electrical testing characterised by what is being tested not provided for elsewhere
    • G01R31/28Testing of electronic circuits, e.g. by signal tracer
    • G01R31/2851Testing of integrated circuits [IC]
    • G01R31/2886Features relating to contacting the IC under test, e.g. probe heads; chucks
    • G01R31/2887Features relating to contacting the IC under test, e.g. probe heads; chucks involving moving the probe head or the IC under test; docking stations

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Manipulator (AREA)
  • Testing Of Individual Semiconductor Devices (AREA)
  • Investigating Strength Of Materials By Application Of Mechanical Stress (AREA)
  • Testing Or Measuring Of Semiconductors Or The Like (AREA)
  • Supporting Of Heads In Record-Carrier Devices (AREA)
  • Tests Of Electronic Circuits (AREA)
  • Cable Accessories (AREA)

Abstract

An apparatus supports a load such as an electronic test head. A force sensor detects a force received from a load that results from an imbalance of the load to produce a torque about an axis of rotation of the load. The force source provides a counter force relative to the load in response to the force detected by the force sensor. A method of interfacing an electronic test head mounted in a test head manipulator with an electronic device handler is also provided. The docking method includes measuring a magnitude of an imbalance force along or about at least one of a plurality of axes of motion of the test head manipulator and providing a counter force to the imbalance force.

Description

用于具有主动柔顺性的测试头的操纵器Manipulator for test heads with active compliance

技术领域technical field

本发明涉及使测试头相对于一根或多根轴保持平衡的方法和设备。并且,本发明还提供了相对于一根或多根轴为测试头提供运动的柔顺范围(compliant range of motion)的方法和设备。The present invention relates to methods and apparatus for balancing a test head relative to one or more axes. Also, the present invention provides methods and apparatus for providing a compliant range of motion for a test head relative to one or more axes.

背景技术Background technique

在集成电路、芯片、和晶片的测试中,习惯的做法是使用包括测试头和处理待测项目的仪器的系统。处理仪器可以是封装的器件处理器、晶片检测器、或其它设备。为了简便起见,我们将称这样的仪器为“器件处理器”或简称为“处理器”。测试头与处理器“对接”。然后,可以在测试头和集成电路之间建立电路连接,以便测试头可以进行适当的测试。In the testing of integrated circuits, chips, and wafers, it is customary to use a system that includes a test head and an instrument that handles the item under test. The processing instrument may be a packaged device handler, wafer inspector, or other device. For simplicity, we will refer to such instruments as "device processors" or simply "processors". The test head is "docked" with the processor. A circuit connection can then be established between the test head and the integrated circuit so that the test head can perform proper testing.

一般说来,有两种对接方法,即,致动器驱动对接和操纵器驱动对接。公知为“致动器驱动”对接的技术首先公开在授予Smith的美国专利第4,589,815号(下文称为‘815)中,它的一些变型以后被开发出来,并公开在授予Ames的美国专利第5,654,631号、授予Bogden的第5,744,974号、授予Chiu等人的第5,982,182号、授予Slocum等人的第6,104,202号,和也授予Slocum等人的第5,821,764中。它们统统合并于此,以供参考。In general, there are two methods of docking, namely, actuator-driven docking and manipulator-driven docking. A technique known as "actuator-driven" docking was first disclosed in US Patent No. 4,589,815 to Smith (hereinafter '815), and some variations of it were later developed and disclosed in US Patent No. 5,654,631 to Ames. Nos. 5,744,974 to Bogden, 5,982,182 to Chiu et al., 6,104,202 to Slocum et al., and 5,821,764 also to Slocum et al. They are incorporated here in their entirety for reference.

在一般意义上,对接系统在要对接的两个项目之一上需要“对准结构”,该对准结构与两个项目中的另一个上的“对准插孔”接合。在‘815专利中,包含有作为对准结构的导销,并包含有作为对准插孔的导销插孔和角板。在授予Chiu等人和Slocum等人的三个专利中,在所有六个自由度中的对准通过动态耦合来提供,动态耦合在“没有多于两个的接触点是共线的”提供表面之间提供六个接触点。在这些专利中,在要对接的两个项目之一上的“动态表面”用作对准插孔;和在两个项目的另一个上的“动态配合表面”起对准结构的作用。在这些专利中描述的优选实施例中,球或球状表面是动态配合表面或对准结构,而凹槽是动态表面或对准插孔。正如这些专利所指出的那样,可以使用许多其它表面组合。In a general sense, a docking system requires an "alignment structure" on one of the two items to be docked that engages with an "alignment receptacle" on the other of the two items. In the '815 patent, guide pins are included as alignment structures, and guide pin receptacles and gussets are included as alignment receptacles. In the three patents issued to Chiu et al. and Slocum et al., alignment in all six degrees of freedom is provided by dynamic coupling that provides surfaces where "no more than two points of contact are collinear" Provides six touchpoints between. In these patents, a "dynamic surface" on one of the two items to be mated acts as an alignment receptacle; and a "dynamic mating surface" on the other of the two items acts as an alignment structure. In the preferred embodiments described in these patents, the ball or spherical surface is the dynamic mating surface or alignment feature and the groove is the dynamic surface or alignment receptacle. As indicated in these patents, many other surface combinations can be used.

在‘815专利中描述的对接组件类似于部分显示在本申请的图13中的垂直平面处理器位置(Vertical Plane Handler Position)中(图13左下方的图形被部分剖开)的两点对接组件1340。在图13中,只显示了连接到测试头上的一半组件。这些二点对接组件都使用2个导销912和各自的配合孔(在图13中未示出)和2个圆形凸轮910。当通过连接在凸轮910上的把柄914使凸轮910旋转时,与变得完全插入它们的配合孔(未示出)中的导销912一起拖动对接件(dock)的两个半部。线缆915链接2个凸轮910,以便使它们同步旋转。绳索布局使对接件能够通过把力仅施加到两个把柄914中的一个或另一个上来工作。于是,在这种情况下,把柄是对接致动器。The docking assembly described in the '815 patent is similar to the two-point docking assembly partially shown in the Vertical Plane Handler Position in Figure 13 of this application (the figure on the lower left of Figure 13 is partially cut away) 1340. In Figure 13, only half of the components connected to the test head are shown. These two-point docking assemblies all use 2 guide pins 912 and respective mating holes (not shown in FIG. 13 ) and 2 circular cams 910 . When the cam 910 is rotated by the handle 914 attached to the cam 910, the two halves of the dock are dragged along with the guide pin 912 becoming fully inserted into their mating holes (not shown). A cable 915 links the 2 cams 910 so that they rotate synchronously. The cord layout enables the dock to work by applying force to only one or the other of the two handles 914 . Thus, in this case, the handle is the docking actuator.

Reid Ashman制造公司(RAM)制造的对接件[参见网站和销售印刷品]在概念上类似于在‘815专利中描述的那些对接件。但是,在RAM对接件中,线性凸轮用来取代圆形凸轮。此外,RAM对接件利用刚性的机构连杆和钟形曲柄来取代线缆,使凸轮的运动同步。对接件由与各自的钟形曲柄耦合的两个把柄中的一个或另一个致动。Butts made by Reid Ashman Manufacturing Company (RAM) [see website and sales literature] are conceptually similar to those described in the '815 patent. However, in RAM docking pieces, linear cams are used instead of circular cams. In addition, the RAM dock utilizes rigid mechanical links and bell cranks instead of cables to synchronize the motion of the cams. The dock is actuated by one or the other of two handles coupled to respective bell cranks.

可以以各种各样的方式把动力致动器合并到对接件中。例如,可以容易地加入如上所述的线性致动器,把对接驱动直接传递给‘815对接件中的线缆或其它对接件中的机构连杆或线状凸轮。线性致动器可以是包括电动机、电螺线管、或气胎在内的几种类型的任何一种。Powered actuators can be incorporated into the docking member in a variety of ways. For example, a linear actuator as described above could easily be added to transmit docking drive directly to a cable in an '815 docking piece or a mechanical link or wire cam in another docking piece. Linear actuators can be any of several types including electric motors, electric solenoids, or pneumatic tubes.

在美国专利第5,654,631号和第5,744,974号中描述的对接件利用导销和小孔来对准两个半部。但是,对接件由抽成真空时一起推进两个半部的真空器件驱动。只要保持真空,两个半部就一直锁在一起。The docking pieces described in US Patent Nos. 5,654,631 and 5,744,974 utilize guide pins and small holes to align the two halves. However, the docking piece is driven by a vacuum device that pushes the two halves together when evacuated. The two halves stay locked together as long as the vacuum is maintained.

在美国专利第5,821,764号、第5,982,182号和第6,104,202号中公开的对接件利用动态耦合技术,以在两个半部之间提供最终对准。还可以利用导销提供初步对准。导销可以配有卡爪机构,卡爪机构把导销俘获到它的小孔中,防止其逃脱。在‘764和‘202专利中,卡爪机构呈现出自动启动;然而,在‘182专利中,电机驱动器件用于三个导销的每一个。同样,在‘182专利中,三个电机可以单独运行,实现对接部件之间的平面化。在所有这些公开物中,线性致动器用于最后把两个半部拉在一起。公开的线性致动器是气动类型的。The docking elements disclosed in US Pat. Nos. 5,821,764, 5,982,182 and 6,104,202 utilize dynamic coupling techniques to provide final alignment between the two halves. Guide pins may also be utilized to provide preliminary alignment. The guide pin can be equipped with a detent mechanism which captures the guide pin in its aperture preventing it from escaping. In the '764 and '202 patents, the jaw mechanism exhibits automatic activation; however, in the '182 patent, motor drive means are used for each of the three guide pins. Also, in the '182 patent, the three motors can operate independently, enabling planarization between mating parts. In all of these publications, linear actuators are used to finally pull the two halves together. The disclosed linear actuator is of the pneumatic type.

上面讨论的目的是提供某些适用致动器驱动对接技术的概况。可以看出,对接件可以由各种不同的器件致动。The purpose of the above discussion is to provide an overview of some applicable actuator-driven docking techniques. It can be seen that the docking member can be actuated by various means.

称为“操纵器驱动”对接的另一种可供选择的方法公开在,例如,授予Graham等人的美国专利第5,600,258号和第5,900,737号中。这个可供选择的方法提供操纵器的一根或多根动力并受控的轴(“受控轴”)来定位测试头。例如,并且,正如在提到的专利中所述的那样,在Graham专利中,垂直、俯仰、和横滚轴都是受控轴。只控制单根轴,譬如,垂直轴或翻滚轴的系统也是已知的。位置传感器通常用于把反馈提供给与测试头相对于器件处理器/检测器的位置有关的受控轴。在对接过程中,控制器(或操作器)操作一根受控轴或数根受控轴,首先把测试头带入对接结构的准备就绪状态,然后,继续操作受控轴完成对接。在[Graham等人的专利]中,传感器由控制器用于使测试头的对接表面适当地朝向器件处理器/检测器的对接表面(通常是共面),并在对接完成且已经适当地进行了测试头和器件处理器/检测器之间的电连接时终止运动。没有对接件致动器,并且,通常也没有与操纵器轴无关的分离、独立锁闩机构。如果没有分离、独立的锁闩器,必须把操纵器轴锁定在使测试头保持在完全对接位置上的位置上。An alternative method known as "manipulator-driven" docking is disclosed, for example, in US Patent Nos. 5,600,258 and 5,900,737 to Graham et al. This alternative method provides one or more powered and controlled axes ("controlled axes") of the manipulator to position the test head. For example, and as described in the referenced patent, in the Graham patent the vertical, pitch, and roll axes are all controlled axes. Systems are also known which control only a single axis, eg a vertical axis or a tumbling axis. Position sensors are typically used to provide feedback to the controlled axis regarding the position of the test head relative to the device handler/detector. During the docking process, the controller (or manipulator) operates a controlled axis or several controlled axes, firstly brings the test head into the ready state of the docking structure, and then continues to operate the controlled axes to complete the docking. In [Graham et al. patent], the sensor is used by the controller to properly orient the docking surface of the test head towards the docking surface of the device handler/detector (usually coplanar), and after the docking is complete and has been properly Motion is terminated while testing the electrical connection between the head and the device processor/detector. There is no docking piece actuator and, generally, no separate, independent latch mechanism independent of the manipulator shaft. If there is no separate, independent latch, the manipulator shaft must be locked in a position that holds the test head in the fully docked position.

此外,在操纵器驱动系统中,让测试头在所有轴上都保持平衡并非合乎需要的或行得通的。不平衡的测试头导致必须由驱动和控制机构,由对准机构,和由器件处理器/检测器本身的结构克服的难以预料和不想要的力。Furthermore, it is not desirable or practical to have the test head balanced in all axes in a manipulator drive system. An unbalanced test head results in unpredictable and unwanted forces that must be overcome by the drive and control mechanism, by the alignment mechanism, and by the structure of the device handler/detector itself.

对接系统被称为“锁闩对接”系统,其中在完全对接时与操纵器单独并无关的机构把测试头锁闩在处理器/检测器上。只通过锁住操纵器轴使测试头保持在完成对接位置上的系统被称为“非锁闩对接”系统。通常,致动器驱动对接系统是锁闩对接系统,而操纵器驱动对接系统是非锁闩对接系统。但是,另一种情况是,这两种结合在一起也是可以的。The docking system is referred to as a "latch docking" system in which a mechanism separate and independent from the manipulator latches the test head to the handler/detector when fully docked. Systems that hold the test head in the fully docked position by locking only the manipulator shaft are referred to as "non-latch docking" systems. Typically, an actuator-driven docking system is a latching docking system, while a manipulator-driven docking system is a non-latching docking system. However, in another case, a combination of the two is also possible.

在把操纵器设计成用于大测试头的情况中,最好让测试头基本上可在多达六根轴或六个运动自由度上自由运动,以促进受控运动的容易程度。这在如名称为“测试头操纵器(TEST HEAD MANIPULATOR)”的PCT国际专利申请第US00/00704号和名称为“在受驱垂直轴测试头操纵器中的抗衡垂直对接运动(COUNTER BALANCED VERTICAL DOCKING MOTION IN ADRIVEN VERTICAL AXIS TEST HEAD MANIPULATOR)”的美国临时专利申请第60/186,196号所讨论的运动轴的手动操纵和安全动力是确实的。这在与器件处理器/检测器的对接/脱离中也是确实的,此处,运动是由如授予Smith的美国专利第4,589,815号、授予Slocum等人的美国专利第5,821,764和6,104,222号、或授予Chiu等人的美国专利第5,982,182号所述的对接系统提供。这种运动自由度或“柔顺运动”在使测试头与处理器对接的过程中特别重要。Where the manipulator is designed for use with a large test head, it is desirable to have the test head substantially free of movement in as many as six axes, or degrees of freedom of motion, to facilitate ease of controlled movement. This is described, for example, in PCT International Patent Application No. US00/00704 entitled "TEST HEAD MANIPULATOR" and "COUNTER BALANCED VERTICAL DOCKING IN A DRIVEN VERTICAL AXIS TEST HEAD MANIPULATOR". MOTION IN ADRIVEN VERTICAL AXIS TEST HEAD MANIPULATOR)" U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/186,196 discusses manual manipulation and safe powering of axes of motion. This is also true in docking/undocking of device handlers/detectors, where motion is determined by, for example, U.S. Patent No. 4,589,815 to Smith, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,821,764 and 6,104,222 to Slocum et al., or The docking system described in US Patent No. 5,982,182 to Chiu et al. provides. This freedom of movement, or "soft motion," is especially important in the process of interfacing the test head with the handler.

提供与地面平行的运动的两根轴(从一侧到另一侧和从里到外)和与地板垂直的轴(从上到下)显示在图14中。这三根轴包括x-轴(从一侧到另一侧)1315、y-轴(从内到外)1325、和z-轴(从上到下)1335。还显示了三根枢转轴,包括俯仰轴(x)1310、横滚轴(y)1320、和偏转(和横摆)轴(z)1330。在与地板平行的两根轴(x和y)中,一般通过低摩擦轴承和轨道等,或者,在如也授予Smith的美国专利第4,527,942号所述的铰接臂中提供运动自由性。在垂直或上、下轴(z轴)的情况中,典型的做法是,除了轴被操作者故意锁住之外,使用配重来达到基本上无重量状态,以便提供所需运动自由性。上-下轴中已知的其它技术是使用如在授予Beaucoup等人的美国专利第4,943,020号中所述的弹簧机构、和如授予Slocum等人的美国专利第5,931,048号、和授予Smith的美国专利第5,149,029和4,705,447号中所述的气动装置。但是,授予Alden的美国专利第5,949,002号指出,采取这样的方法存在某些困难,并且,建议使用包含测压元件力传感器的伺服控制环路。但是,包含带力和位置反馈的伺服控制环路的技术既复杂又昂贵,在出现故障的情况下,不能提供操作者驾御系统的简单方法。The two axes providing motion parallel to the ground (side to side and inside out) and the axis perpendicular to the floor (top to bottom) are shown in FIG. 14 . These three axes include an x-axis (side to side) 1315 , a y-axis (inside to outside) 1325 , and a z-axis (top to bottom) 1335 . Also shown are three pivot axes including pitch (x) 1310 , roll (y) 1320 , and yaw (and yaw) (z) 1330 axes. In two axes (x and y) parallel to the floor, freedom of movement is generally provided by low friction bearings and tracks etc., or in an articulated arm as described in US Patent No. 4,527,942 also to Smith. In the case of a vertical or upper and lower axis (z-axis), it is typical to use a counterweight to achieve a substantially weightless state, in order to provide the required freedom of movement, unless the axis is intentionally locked by the operator. Other techniques known in up-down shafts are the use of a spring mechanism as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,943,020 to Beaucoup et al., and U.S. Patent No. 5,931,048 to Slocum et al., and U.S. Patent No. 5,931,048 to Smith. Pneumatic devices described in Nos. 5,149,029 and 4,705,447. However, US Patent No. 5,949,002 to Alden notes certain difficulties in taking such an approach and suggests the use of a servo control loop that includes a load cell force sensor. However, techniques involving servo control loops with force and position feedback are complex and expensive, and do not provide an easy way for the operator to steer the system in the event of a failure.

在俯仰、侧滚、和横摆转动的情况中,众所周知,把枢转轴设成使它们几乎穿过测试头和它的附属安装机构和绳索的重心。通过加上压块配重,在翻滚模式操纵器中这已经实现。在绳索枢转操纵器上,正如授予Holt的美国专利第5,450,766号所述,这通过提供各种各样的垫片来改变背靠在凸出的绳索枢转操纵器上的内支架的长度来实现。In the case of pitch, roll, and yaw rotations, it is known to set the pivot axes so that they pass almost through the center of gravity of the test head and its attached mounting mechanism and rope. This has been achieved in the roll mode manipulator by adding a briquetting counterweight. On cable pivot manipulators, this is done by providing a variety of shims to vary the length of the inner bracket that backs up on the protruding cable pivot manipulator, as described in US Patent No. 5,450,766 to Holt. accomplish.

如图13所示,把测试头内部的一根或多根转动轴设在测试头和绳索组件的实际重心上或附近也许是合算的。请注意,在测试头结构内,综合了俯仰和横摆运动。在图13中,这些被显示成俯仰轴1310(±5°的θX)和横摆轴1320(±5°的θZ)。横滚轴1330(±90-95°的θY)也显示在图13中。As shown in Figure 13, it may be beneficial to locate one or more axes of rotation within the test head at or near the actual center of gravity of the test head and cord assembly. Note that within the test head structure, pitch and yaw motions are combined. In FIG. 13 these are shown as pitch axis 1310 (θX of ±5°) and roll axis 1320 (θZ of ±5°). Roll axis 1330 (θY of ±90-95°) is also shown in FIG. 13 .

在目前的系统中,可以证明,设置大约±5°运动的俯仰轴,至少±90°运动(在测试头外部)的横滚轴、和在测试头内的大约±5°横摆运动是合乎需要的。这是因为,通过使用,例如,分别在授予Holt的美国专利第5,450,766号和也授予Holt的美国专利第5,608,333号中描述的“CPPJ”(用于俯仰)和SplitRing Cable Pivot技术,在重心上或附近实现这些轴所需的结构的范围显著地小于当它们在测试头的外部时实现这些轴所需的结构的范围。In the current system, it can be shown that it is desirable to have a pitch axis of approximately ±5° movement, a roll axis of at least ±90° movement (outside the test head), and approximately ±5° yaw movement within the test head needs. This is because, by using, for example, the "CPPJ" (for pitch) and SplitRing Cable Pivot techniques described in U.S. Patent No. 5,450,766 to Holt and U.S. Patent No. 5,608,333 also to Holt, respectively, at the center of gravity or The extent of structures required to implement these axes nearby is significantly smaller than the extent of structures required to implement these axes when they are external to the test head.

已经建议通过把球轴承设在测试头的重心附近来实现这个概念。可以沿着内外方向配备移动球轴承的位置的外部调整装置,以便当测试头处在DUT(正在测试之中的器件)向上或DUT向下方位时,可以从物理上定位它,使俯仰轴(或翻滚)轴平衡。球轴承缺点在于它同时提供所有三个转动自由度。It has been proposed to implement this concept by locating ball bearings near the center of gravity of the test head. External adjustments that move the position of the ball bearings in the in-out direction can be equipped so that the test head can be physically positioned such that the pitch axis ( or tumble) shaft balance. The disadvantage of a ball bearing is that it provides all three rotational degrees of freedom simultaneously.

尽管希望这样,但是把这些内部轴设在真实测试头的真正重心上或非常接近的地方是非常困难的。改变测试头内部引脚电子线路板的多少和测试头绳索的长度和重量以满足特殊测试装置最终用户的需要的实际活动往往导致重心位置的显著偏移,因此,导致显著的不平衡力。另外,随着测试头通过它的运动包络线移动,由绳索施加在测试头上的力会发生改变;当使用固定结构的系统时,这引起可变的不平衡力。这些不平衡力妨碍了相对于一根或多根运动轴所希望的可自由运动状态。Although desirable, it is very difficult to locate these internal axes at or very close to the true center of gravity of a real test head. The physical act of varying the amount of pin electronics board inside the test head and the length and weight of the test head cord to meet the needs of a particular test setup end user often results in a significant shift in the center of gravity position and, therefore, significant unbalanced forces. Additionally, as the test head moves through its motion envelope, the force exerted by the cord on the test head changes; this causes variable unbalanced forces when a fixed structure system is used. These unbalanced forces prevent desired free movement relative to one or more axes of motion.

正如传统上对操纵器所做的那样,无论运动轴在测试头的内部,还是在测试头的外部,还经常希望把运动轴的位置重新定位到远离重心的位置上。这方面的例子是,把翻滚轴定位在非常接近非常厚测试头的DUT接口处,而不是通常靠近测试头的物理中心的测试头重心上。如果测试头有一米厚,那么,把翻滚枢转轴设在重心上,并由此在物理中心附近暗示着操纵器将需要至少一米(100cm)的垂直运动范围(冲程)。如果有可能把翻滚枢转轴设在DUT表面内13cm处,那么,操纵器的垂直冲程将减少74cm(100cm-26cm),从而降低了操纵器的总高度,或者,对于相对于给定轴承结构的较大负载容量,允许使用较长的主臂。但是,正如上面所指出的那样,把测试头的重心移动到远离已知物理中心的地方会产生不平衡力。并且,这些不平衡力使测试头处在不平衡状态,致使它不能沿着所有六根轴自由运动。Whether the axis of motion is inside or outside the test head, it is often desirable to reposition the axis of motion away from the center of gravity, as is traditionally done for manipulators. An example of this is positioning the tumble axis very close to the DUT interface for very thick test heads, rather than at the center of gravity of the test head which is usually close to the physical center of the test head. If the test head is one meter thick, then placing the roll pivot axis at the center of gravity, and thus near the physical center, implies that the manipulator will require a vertical range of motion (stroke) of at least one meter (100cm). If it were possible to place the roll pivot axis 13 cm inside the DUT surface, then the vertical stroke of the manipulator would be reduced by 74 cm (100 cm - 26 cm), thereby reducing the overall height of the manipulator, or, for a given bearing structure Larger load capacity allows use of longer booms. However, as noted above, moving the center of gravity of the test head away from the known physical center creates unbalanced forces. Also, these unbalanced forces unbalance the test head so that it cannot move freely along all six axes.

这样,随着测试头变得越来越大和越来越复杂,在每根关键运动轴中的不平衡力相应地增加。最好有一种措施能够把这些不平衡力中和掉,以便在为操作者和仪器二者的安全提供保证的同时,可以有效地操纵和定位测试头。Thus, as test heads become larger and more complex, the unbalanced forces in each of the critical axes of motion correspondingly increase. It would be desirable to have a means of neutralizing these unbalanced forces so that the test head can be efficiently manipulated and positioned while providing for the safety of both the operator and the instrument.

发明内容Contents of the invention

本发明涉及用于使测试头相对于一根轴保持平衡,以便测试头相对于该根轴基本上无重量的设备和方法。本发明可应用于测试头操纵器的多根轴。并且,本发明还涉及相对于测试头的至少一根轴为测试头提供运动的柔顺范围的设备和方法。The present invention relates to apparatus and methods for balancing a test head relative to a shaft so that the test head is substantially weightless relative to the shaft. The invention is applicable to multiple axes of a test head manipulator. Also, the present invention relates to apparatus and methods for providing a compliant range of motion for a test head relative to at least one axis of the test head.

附图说明Description of drawings

图1(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、与测试头耦合的平衡单元的透视图;Figure 1(a) is a perspective view of a balancing unit coupled to a test head according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图1(b)是根据本发明另一个示范性实施例的、与测试头耦合的平衡单元的透视图;Figure 1(b) is a perspective view of a balancing unit coupled with a test head according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图1(c)是根据本发明又一个示范性实施例的、与测试头耦合的平衡单元的透视图;Figure 1(c) is a perspective view of a balancing unit coupled with a test head according to yet another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图1(d)是根据本发明又一个示范性实施例的、与测试头耦合的平衡单元的透视图;Figure 1(d) is a perspective view of a balancing unit coupled with a test head according to yet another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图2(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、与安装在支架中的测试头耦合的平衡单元的透视图;Figure 2(a) is a perspective view of a balancing unit coupled with a test head mounted in a stand according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图2(b)是根据本发明另一个示范性实施例的、与安装在支架中的测试头耦合的平衡单元的透视图;Figure 2(b) is a perspective view of a balancing unit coupled with a test head installed in a stand according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图3(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、与用内部轴承支承的测试头耦合的平衡单元的透视图;Figure 3(a) is a perspective view of a balancing unit coupled with a test head supported by internal bearings, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图3(b)是根据本发明另一个示范性实施例的、与用内部轴承支承的测试头耦合的平衡单元的透视图;Figure 3(b) is a perspective view of a balancing unit coupled with a test head supported by internal bearings according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图4(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的气压缸的详细剖面图;Figure 4 (a) is a detailed cross-sectional view of a pneumatic cylinder according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图4(b)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的液压缸的详细剖面图;Figure 4(b) is a detailed cross-sectional view of a hydraulic cylinder according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图5(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、包括位置传感器和机械锁定器的柔顺驱动机构的透视图;Figure 5(a) is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism including a position sensor and a mechanical lock, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图5(b)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、包括位置传感器和液压锁定器的柔顺驱动机构的透视图;Figure 5(b) is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism including a position sensor and a hydraulic lock, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图5(c)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、包括位置传感器和两个柔顺定心致动器的柔顺驱动机构的透视图;Figure 5(c) is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism including a position sensor and two compliant centering actuators according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图6(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的柔顺驱动机构和气动平衡单元的透视图;Figure 6(a) is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism and a pneumatic balancing unit according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图6(b)是根据本发明另一个示范性实施例的柔顺驱动机构和气动平衡单元的透视图;Figure 6(b) is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism and a pneumatic balancing unit according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图7是根据本发明又一个示范性实施例的柔顺驱动机构的透视图;7 is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism according to yet another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图8(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、耦合在一起的柔顺驱动机构和气动平衡单元的透视图;Figure 8(a) is a perspective view of a coupled compliant drive mechanism and a pneumatic balancing unit according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图8(b)是根据本发明另一个示范性实施例的、耦合在一起的柔顺驱动机构和气动平衡单元的透视图;Fig. 8(b) is a perspective view of a coupled compliant drive mechanism and a pneumatic balancing unit according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图9(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、与作用在第一转轴上的气动平衡单元耦合的第一柔顺驱动机构、和与作用于第二转轴上的气动平衡单元耦合的第二柔顺驱动机构的透视图;Fig. 9(a) is a first compliant driving mechanism coupled with a pneumatic balance unit acting on a first rotating shaft and a first compliant driving mechanism coupled with a pneumatic balancing unit acting on a second rotating shaft according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Two perspective views of the compliant drive mechanism;

图9(b)是根据本发明另一个示范性实施例的、与作用在第一转轴上的气动平衡单元耦合的第一柔顺驱动机构、和与作用于第二转轴上的气动平衡单元耦合的第二柔顺驱动机构的透视图;Fig. 9(b) shows the first compliant driving mechanism coupled with the pneumatic balance unit acting on the first rotating shaft and the coupling with the pneumatic balancing unit acting on the second rotating shaft according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention. A perspective view of a second compliant drive mechanism;

图10(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、在垂直轴上的柔顺驱动机构的透视图;Figure 10(a) is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism on a vertical axis, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图10(b)是根据本发明另一个示范性实施例的、在垂直轴上的柔顺驱动机构的透视图;Figure 10(b) is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism on a vertical axis according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图10(c)是根据本发明再一个示范性实施例的、在垂直轴上的柔顺驱动机构的透视图;Figure 10(c) is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism on a vertical axis according to yet another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图10(d)是根据本发明又一个示范性实施例的、在垂直轴上的柔顺驱动机构的透视图;Figure 10(d) is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism on a vertical axis according to yet another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图10(f)是根据本发明还一个示范性实施例的、在垂直轴上的柔顺驱动机构的透视图;Figure 10(f) is a perspective view of a compliant drive mechanism on a vertical axis according to yet another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图11是根据本发明另一个示范性实施例的、具有数个柔顺驱动机构的测试头操纵器的透视图;11 is a perspective view of a test head manipulator with several compliant drive mechanisms according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图12(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、将测试头与处理器对接的对接设备的透视图;Figure 12(a) is a perspective view of a docking device for docking a test head with a processor according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图12(b)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、与处理器耦合的对接设备的透视图;Figure 12(b) is a perspective view of a docking device coupled to a processor according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图12(c)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、将测试头与处理器对接的对接设备的剖面图;Figure 12(c) is a cross-sectional view of a docking device for docking a test head with a processor according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图12(d)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、与处理器耦合的对接设备的另一个剖面图;Figure 12(d) is another cross-sectional view of a docking device coupled to a processor according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

图13是现有测试头的装配图;Fig. 13 is the assembly diagram of existing test head;

图14是六根运动轴的图例;Figure 14 is a legend of six motion axes;

图15(a)-15(n)是根据本发明各种示范性实施例的流程图。15(a)-15(n) are flowcharts according to various exemplary embodiments of the present invention.

具体实施方式Detailed ways

在下面本发明几个实施例的详细描述中,将参照前面列出的附图。应该理解,这些图有意画成不成比例的,而是,它们画成强调本发明的重要特征。In the following detailed description of several embodiments of the invention, reference is made to the accompanying drawings listed above. It should be understood that the figures are intentionally not drawn to scale; rather, they are drawn to emphasize important features of the invention.

在器件测试的过程中,显而易见,测试头保持完全对接。处理器/检测器配有相对于测试接口轮流自动定位待测试的每个器件的机构。这在通过对接件与测试头和操纵器耦合的处理器/检测器中产生了低频机械振动。必须安全地耗散掉这些振动相关联的能量。因此之故,许多用户在测试期间喜欢使用锁闩的对接件,并喜欢让操纵器轴松开。在这种情况下,振动方便地通过操纵器轴的运动而被吸收,且能量耗散在它们相关的摩擦中。另一方面,如果在测试期间牢固地锁住操纵器轴,那么,系统弹性差的部分将主要吸收振动。测试头和正在测试之中的器件之间的接口中的电触点,包括,例如,底下装有弹簧(pogo)的引脚和探针,是精密的机械结构,其吸收这样的振动能量可能会损害或使它们的使用寿命降低。在非锁闩对称系统中,最好锁住某些操纵器轴,以在测试的同时使测试头保持完成对接。为了使一根或多根轴松开以吸收振动,有必要让它们保持平衡和柔顺。因此,在对接测试头的同时,保持一根轴处在平衡柔顺状态下是有益的。During device testing, it was apparent that the test head remained fully docked. The handler/detector is equipped with a mechanism for automatically positioning each device to be tested in turn relative to the test interface. This creates low frequency mechanical vibrations in the processor/detector coupled to the test head and manipulator by the docking piece. The energy associated with these vibrations must be safely dissipated. For this reason, many users prefer to use the latch's mating piece and leave the manipulator shaft loose during testing. In this case, the vibrations are conveniently absorbed by the movement of the manipulator shaft and the energy is dissipated in their associated friction. On the other hand, if the manipulator shaft is locked securely during the test, then the less elastic parts of the system will mainly absorb the vibration. The electrical contacts in the interface between the test head and the device under test, including, for example, pogo pins and probes, are delicate mechanical structures that absorb such vibrational energy that may damage or reduce their service life. In non-latching symmetric systems, it is desirable to lock some of the manipulator axes to keep the test head docked while testing. In order for one or more shafts to loosen to absorb vibration, it is necessary to keep them balanced and compliant. Therefore, it is beneficial to keep one shaft in a balanced and compliant state while docking the test head.

另外的考虑是,当与器件处理器或检测器对接时,不平衡的测试头将把它所有或一部分的不平衡力施加在与之对接的设备上。通常,只把这样的设备设计成支承垂直负载。不平衡力未必是垂直的,一般说来,具有不可预测的大小和方向。未知不平衡力可以潜在地对仪器造成伤害,并危及合并在其中处理晶片和器件的自动机构。因此,如果在测试头与器件处理器/检测器对接的整个间隔内可以中和不平衡力,那就最好不过了。An additional consideration is that when docking with a device handler or detector, an unbalanced test head will exert all or a portion of its unbalanced forces on the device it is docking with. Typically, such equipment is only designed to support vertical loads. Unbalanced forces are not necessarily vertical and generally have unpredictable magnitude and direction. Unknown unbalanced forces can potentially cause damage to the instrumentation and compromise the automated mechanisms incorporated therein to process wafers and devices. Therefore, it would be great if unbalanced forces could be neutralized throughout the interval where the test head interfaces with the device handler/detector.

此外,在垂直装载在器件处理器/检测器上的情况中,许多传统操纵器是平衡型的,其把测试头保持在基本无重量状态。这使测试头在器件处理器/检测器上的垂直负载达到最小,从而简化了它的结构要求。此外,对于含有硬驱动垂直轴的操纵器,在对接期间可以把部分负载传递到器件处理器/检测器上,这增大了对它们的结构要求。因此,最好在具有垂直柔顺性的硬驱动垂直轴操纵器中,能够在测试头保持与器件处理器/检测器对接的整个时间内维持平衡状态。在基于气动的平衡机构的情况中,气体的最终泄漏意味着平衡力的丧失。Furthermore, in the case of vertical loading on a device handler/detector, many conventional manipulators are counterbalanced, which keeps the test head in a substantially weightless state. This minimizes the vertical loading of the test head on the device processor/detector, thereby simplifying its architectural requirements. Furthermore, for manipulators with hard-driven vertical axes, part of the load may be transferred to the device processor/detector during docking, which increases the structural requirements on them. Therefore, it would be desirable in a hard-driven vertical axis manipulator with vertical compliance to be able to maintain a balanced state the entire time the test head remains docked with the device handler/detector. In the case of a pneumatically based balancing mechanism, an eventual leakage of gas means a loss of balancing force.

还有一种考虑是,在含有气动柔顺机构的测试头操纵器系统中,当测试头非常接近对接机构时,通常有必要在对接之前马上使系统达到平衡。在目前已知的一些系统中,为了做到这一点,测试头必须在它的整个柔顺范围内自由运动。根据经验,在这样的平衡过程中,测试头可能突然地和出人意料地移动显著的距离,产生很大的冲力。这样的移动潜在地引起与对接设备的碰撞,导致精密电触点受到损害。此外,操作人员也可能处在危险之中。Another consideration is that in test head manipulator systems that include pneumatically compliant mechanisms, when the test head is in close proximity to the docking mechanism, it is often necessary to bring the system into equilibrium immediately prior to docking. In some currently known systems, in order to do this, the test head must move freely throughout its full compliance range. As a rule of thumb, during such a balancing process, the test head may suddenly and unexpectedly move a significant distance, generating a large momentum. Such movement potentially causes collisions with docking equipment, resulting in damage to delicate electrical contacts. In addition, operators may also be at risk.

由于测试头变得越来越大和越来越复杂,在关键运动轴中的不平衡也相应地增加。重要的是,有一种措施能够把这些不平衡中和,以便测试头可以有效地且在操作者和仪器二者安全情况下得以操纵和定位。As test heads become larger and more complex, imbalances in critical axes of motion increase accordingly. It is important to have a means of neutralizing these imbalances so that the test head can be manipulated and positioned efficiently and in the safety of both the operator and the instrument.

已经提出的一种技术是使用一个或多个气缸,譬如,双作用气压缸,抵消不平衡力。这样的气缸具有两个气体进口和装配在它们之间的活塞。第一气体进口被称为伸出进口,第二气体进口被称为缩回进口。活塞依它两侧上的气压差而移动。附在活塞上的连杆与气缸同轴并穿过一端,以把线性力和运动施加在负载上。如果在伸出输入上的压力大于在缩回输入上的压力,那么,连杆从气缸伸出来。反之,如果在缩回输入上的压力大于在伸出输入上的压力,那么,连杆缩回到气缸。可以包括位置传感器,以指示活塞的位置。因此,可以理解的是这样的活塞和适当的控制系统可以与特定轴,例如,俯仰轴相关联地使用。随着测试头得到操纵和对接,控制系统将按需要把气体泵入伸出进口或缩回进口中,以消除任何不平衡力和提供柔顺运动。可以想像,双作用气压缸将提供类弹簧作用;即,当压差已经调整到抵消轴的不平衡力时,可以使测试头好像它的确与非常小的力达到平衡那样移动。One technique that has been proposed is to use one or more cylinders, eg, double-acting pneumatic cylinders, to counteract unbalanced forces. Such a cylinder has two gas inlets and a piston fitted between them. The first gas inlet is called the extended inlet and the second gas inlet is called the retracted inlet. The piston moves according to the difference in air pressure on either side of it. A connecting rod attached to the piston is coaxial with the cylinder and passes through one end to impart linear force and motion to the load. If the pressure on the extend input is greater than the pressure on the retract input, the connecting rod extends from the cylinder. Conversely, if the pressure on the retract input is greater than the pressure on the extend input, then the connecting rod retracts into the cylinder. A position sensor may be included to indicate the position of the piston. It will therefore be appreciated that such pistons and appropriate control systems may be used in connection with a particular axis, for example the pitch axis. As the test head is manipulated and docked, the control system will pump air into the extension or retraction inlets as required to eliminate any unbalanced forces and provide compliant motion. It is conceivable that a double-acting pneumatic cylinder would provide a spring-like action; that is, when the differential pressure has been adjusted to counteract the unbalanced force of the shaft, it could cause the test head to move as if it were indeed in equilibrium with a very small force.

由于几方面原因,这种方法非常难以实现。首先,唯一反馈机制是活塞的位置。其次,密封用在气压缸中,使从活塞的一侧到另一侧和从连杆穿过气缸末端的那一点处的气体泄漏达到最小。在运动路径中的这些密封提供了静摩擦和动摩擦。通常,气压缸呈现称为“挣脱力(break away force)”的特性。气压缸的挣脱力是克服静摩擦和让活塞在气缸内运动所需的力。静摩擦(静态阻力)可以相当大,并且随时间、使用、和温度改变。静态阻力往往比动或运动摩擦大得多。于是,为了引起改变,控制系统按需要调整气压差,直到至少探测到位置改变(即,运动)为止,然后,对运动加以分析,调整成所需结果。由于静态阻力(静摩擦),开始运动的气压差可能并经常显著大于与气压缸的动摩擦相组合的负载不平衡。这可以导致非线性很大且不稳定的控制问题。尤其在静态阻力分量的动态性质方面,稳固的解决方案难以实现和维持。This approach is very difficult to implement for several reasons. First, the only feedback mechanism is the position of the piston. Second, seals are used in pneumatic cylinders to minimize gas leakage from one side of the piston to the other and from the point where the connecting rod crosses the end of the cylinder. These seals in the path of motion provide both static and kinetic friction. Typically, pneumatic cylinders exhibit a characteristic known as a "break away force". The breakaway force of a pneumatic cylinder is the force required to overcome static friction and move the piston within the cylinder. Stiction (static resistance) can be considerable and changes with time, use, and temperature. Static resistance tends to be much greater than kinetic or motion friction. Then, to cause the change, the control system adjusts the air pressure differential as needed until at least a change in position (ie, motion) is detected, and then the motion is analyzed and adjusted to the desired result. Due to stiction (static friction), the air pressure differential to initiate motion can be, and often is, significantly greater than the load imbalance combined with the dynamic friction of the pneumatic cylinder. This can lead to highly nonlinear and unstable control problems. Especially with regard to the dynamic nature of the static drag component, robust solutions are difficult to achieve and maintain.

双作用气压缸提供了补偿测试头轴中的不平衡的有用措施的可能性;但是,需要新的方法来实现有用的解决方案。本发明的第二个目的是提供克服双作用气压缸的缺点以稳固地利用它的优点的措施。Double-acting pneumatic cylinders offer the possibility of a useful measure of compensation for imbalances in the test head shaft; however, new approaches are required to achieve useful solutions. A second object of the present invention is to provide measures to overcome the disadvantages of the double-acting pneumatic cylinder in order to utilize its advantages firmly.

在示范性的实施例中,主发明补偿至少一根测试头轴中的不平衡力,以便可以有效地和安全地操纵、对接和脱离测试头。本发明包含与其它部件和新的基本控制方案结合在一起的、像如上所述的至少一个双作用气压缸(例如)那样的力源。气缸和这些部件的组合体被称为“平衡单元”。总之,对于单根轴,首先测试头相对于它的支承结构设置和锁定在所希望位置上。因此,相对于正在考虑之中的那一轴锁定测试头。包括在平衡单元中的力传感器(即,双向测压元件)测量相对于锁定轴的不平衡力,以确定是否存在显著的不平衡量和不平衡的方向。然后,调整双作用气压缸两侧的气压,以便把力传感器检测到的力降低到某个预定最小值以下,取决于测试头的重量和气缸的特性,通常认为5到25磅是合理的。然后,释放锁定器,气压缸内的压差通过连杆将力传给测试头,以抵消不平衡力。可以想要多频繁就多频繁地重复该过程,使所选测试头轴保持在平衡、可自由运动状态。In an exemplary embodiment, the subject invention compensates for unbalanced forces in at least one test head shaft so that the test head can be efficiently and safely maneuvered, docked, and undocked. The invention comprises a force source like at least one double-acting pneumatic cylinder (for example) as described above combined with other components and a new basic control scheme. The combination of the cylinder and these components is called a "balancing unit". In summary, for a single shaft, first the test head is set and locked in the desired position relative to its supporting structure. Therefore, the test head is locked relative to the axis under consideration. A force sensor (ie, a bi-directional load cell) included in the balancing unit measures the unbalanced force relative to the locking shaft to determine if there is a significant amount of unbalance and the direction of the unbalance. The air pressure on either side of the double-acting cylinder is then adjusted to reduce the force sensed by the force transducer below some predetermined minimum, depending on the weight of the test head and the characteristics of the cylinder, 5 to 25 pounds is generally considered reasonable. Then, the locker is released, and the pressure difference in the pneumatic cylinder transmits force to the test head through the connecting rod to counteract the unbalanced force. This process can be repeated as often as desired, keeping the selected test head shaft in a balanced, free-to-run state.

图1(a)是根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、用于测试头操纵器的测试头平衡系统的透视图。这里提供了含有两个端部的平衡单元110。如上所述,平衡单元是用于使测试头相对于一根轴保持平衡的、与其它部件和新的控制方案结合在一起的力源(即,双作用气压缸)。平衡单元1101的第一端部与测试头100相连接。平衡单元110的第二端部与用于枢转轴102的支承结构(未示出)相连接。平衡单元110的用途是当测试头100的重心与枢转轴102不重合时,有助于测试头100绕着枢转轴102转动。在图1(a)所示的示范性实施例中,平衡单元110包括双作用气压缸、及其相关部件,如下所述。Figure 1(a) is a perspective view of a test head balancing system for a test head manipulator according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. There is provided a balancing unit 110 having two ends. As mentioned above, the balancing unit is the force source (ie double-acting pneumatic cylinder) used to balance the test head relative to an axis, combined with other components and a new control scheme. A first end of the balancing unit 1101 is connected to the test head 100 . A second end of the balancing unit 110 is connected to a bearing structure (not shown) for the pivot shaft 102 . The purpose of the balance unit 110 is to facilitate the rotation of the test head 100 around the pivot axis 102 when the center of gravity of the test head 100 does not coincide with the pivot axis 102 . In the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 1( a ), the balancing unit 110 includes a double-acting pneumatic cylinder, and its associated components, as described below.

平衡单元110包括力传感器120,和力杆112。力传感器110与力杆112耦合,以便它测量沿着力杆的力。力杆112通过轴承116a与测试头100相连接。如果测试头100的重心与枢转轴102不重合,那么,由测试头100绕着枢转轴102施加一个力。通过它与力杆112的连接,力传感器120测量出这个力的至少一个分量。The balance unit 110 includes a force sensor 120 and a force bar 112 . Force sensor 110 is coupled to force rod 112 so that it measures force along the force rod. The force bar 112 is connected with the test head 100 through the bearing 116a. If the center of gravity of the test head 100 does not coincide with the pivot axis 102 , then a force is exerted by the test head 100 about the pivot axis 102 . Via its connection to force rod 112 , force sensor 120 measures at least one component of this force.

力传感器120可以是可以测量和指示(例如,向控制器)测试头100相对于枢转轴102的不平衡力的大小和方向的典型的双向测压元件。力传感器120可以包含应变仪,其以众所周知的方式处在桥式电路之中,提供随测量力单调变化的电压输出。利用模拟-数字转换器和处理器,可以确定沿着力杆112的力是否大于自由运动所能容忍的最大值;并且,如果是的话,确定力的方向。另外,模拟比较器电路可以以已知的方式用于产生指示显著不平衡力的存在和方向的是/否(go/nogo)信号。Force sensor 120 may be a typical bi-directional load cell that may measure and indicate (eg, to a controller) the magnitude and direction of an unbalanced force of test head 100 relative to pivot axis 102 . The force sensor 120 may comprise strain gauges in a well-known manner in a bridge circuit providing a voltage output that varies monotonically with the measured force. Using an analog-to-digital converter and a processor, it can be determined whether the force along the force bar 112 is greater than the maximum tolerable for free motion; and, if so, the direction of the force. Additionally, an analog comparator circuit may be used in a known manner to generate a go/nogo signal indicative of the presence and direction of a significant unbalanced force.

力杆112通过锁定器118可滑行地附在气压缸128上,锁定器118包括致动锁定器118的锁定器进口126,当锁定器118未致动时,锁定器118允许力杆相对于气缸128平行移动。于是,当锁定器118未致动时,测试头100可以绕着轴102旋转。当致动锁定器118时,力杆112不再可以相对于气缸128滑动;并且,测试头100被锁定在相对于轴102的某个位置上。锁定器118是现有技术中众所周知的几种类型之一。取决于所选的锁定器118的类型,可以通过电信号、气体输入、或适于特定应用的其它措施来控制它。The force rod 112 is slidably attached to a pneumatic cylinder 128 by a lock 118 which includes a lock inlet 126 which actuates the lock 118 and which allows the force rod to move relative to the cylinder when the lock 118 is not actuated. 128 parallel movements. Thus, test head 100 may rotate about axis 102 when lock 118 is not actuated. When the lock 118 is actuated, the force rod 112 can no longer slide relative to the cylinder 128 ; and the test head 100 is locked in a certain position relative to the shaft 102 . Locker 118 is one of several types well known in the art. Depending on the type of locker 118 selected, it may be controlled by an electrical signal, gas input, or other means appropriate to the particular application.

气压缸128只是用于朝向或远离测试头100推动的力源。当通过力传感器120检测不平衡力时,气压缸128用于通过连杆114把反力施加在测试头100上。在这个示范性实施例中,利用需要气体系统的气压缸128。可以预料,反力可以通过各种其它措施,譬如,液压缸或电磁器件来实现。The pneumatic cylinder 128 is simply a source of force for pushing toward or away from the test head 100 . When an unbalanced force is detected by the force sensor 120 , the pneumatic cylinder 128 is used to exert a counter force on the test head 100 through the connecting rod 114 . In this exemplary embodiment, a pneumatic cylinder 128 is utilized which requires a gas system. It is envisioned that counterforce can be achieved by various other means, such as hydraulic cylinders or electromagnetic devices.

气压缸128通过活塞130与连杆114相连接。连杆114通过轴承116b与测试头100相连接。连杆114布置成与力杆112平行。气缸128的轴和连杆114与测试头100的转轴102正交。把这些轴布置成使沿着每根轴作用的力将产生绕着测试头转轴102的力矩或转矩。用足够的力使连杆114伸缩将使测试头100绕轴102旋转。The pneumatic cylinder 128 is connected with the connecting rod 114 through a piston 130 . The connecting rod 114 is connected with the test head 100 through the bearing 116b. The connecting rod 114 is arranged parallel to the force rod 112 . The axis of the cylinder 128 and the connecting rod 114 are normal to the axis of rotation 102 of the test head 100 . The axes are arranged such that a force acting along each axis will generate a moment or moment about the test head axis of rotation 102 . Telescoping link 114 with sufficient force will cause test head 100 to rotate about axis 102 .

气压缸128通过轴承138与支承结构(未示出)相连接。在气压缸128内部,活塞130按照活塞130的两侧上的气压差移动。气压缸128内活塞130的一侧包含伸出进口134。气压缸128内活塞130的另一侧包含缩回进口132。气压缸的气体进口132和134通过电操纵控制阀(未示出)分别与相对高压气体供应源(未示出)相连接。可选地,可以把蓄能器(未示出)附在每个进口132和134上,来提供大量气体,以作用活塞130。Pneumatic cylinder 128 is connected by bearings 138 to a support structure (not shown). Inside the pneumatic cylinder 128 , the piston 130 moves according to the difference in air pressure on both sides of the piston 130 . One side of the piston 130 within the pneumatic cylinder 128 includes a protruding inlet 134 . The other side of the piston 130 within the pneumatic cylinder 128 contains a retraction inlet 132 . The gas inlets 132 and 134 of the pneumatic cylinder are respectively connected to relatively high-pressure gas supply sources (not shown) through electrically operated control valves (not shown). Optionally, an accumulator (not shown) may be attached to each inlet 132 and 134 to provide a large amount of gas to act on the piston 130 .

在工作时,力传感器120用于检测来自测试头100的不平衡力;然后,把气体提供给缩回进口132和伸出进口134,以抵消力传感器120检测的力。因此,在活塞130两端形成压差。对于这个具有足够大小和方向的压差,其目的是把力杆112中的力减小到小于预定最大许可不平衡力的大小。In operation, force sensor 120 is used to detect an unbalanced force from test head 100 ; gas is then provided to retract inlet 132 and extend inlet 134 to counteract the force detected by force sensor 120 . Therefore, a pressure differential is created across the piston 130 . For this pressure differential to be of sufficient magnitude and direction, the objective is to reduce the force in the force bar 112 to a magnitude less than a predetermined maximum allowable unbalanced force.

仍然参照图1(a),气压缸128还包含两个活塞位置传感器136a和136b,它们指示活塞130在气压缸128内相对于例如控制器的位置。例如,限位开关可以以已知的方式用于指示活塞130是否处在中心位置上,或处在气压缸128的哪一端上。如有必要,可以配备更加复杂的位置传感装置。例如,电位计、绝对编码器、和含有适当电子器件的增量编码器等可以用于提供相对于气压缸128的、与活塞130和连杆114的位置有关的精确位置信息。最好,位置传感机构是可标定的和可调整的,以便于系统构造、设置、和维护。Still referring to FIG. 1( a ), the pneumatic cylinder 128 also includes two piston position sensors 136a and 136b that indicate the position of the piston 130 within the pneumatic cylinder 128 relative to, for example, a controller. For example, limit switches may be used in a known manner to indicate whether the piston 130 is in the center position, or which end of the pneumatic cylinder 128 it is in. If necessary, more complex position sensing devices can be equipped. For example, potentiometers, absolute encoders, incremental encoders with appropriate electronics, etc. may be used to provide precise positional information relative to the position of the piston 130 and connecting rod 114 relative to the pneumatic cylinder 128 . Preferably, the position sensing mechanism is calibratable and adjustable to facilitate system configuration, setup, and maintenance.

可以配备控制器(未示出)来操纵进口阀132和134和锁定器118,并接收位置传感器136a和136b和力传感器120的反馈信号。例如,刚启动时,对于没有与处理器对接的测试头100,通常没有对气压缸128加压。在任何控制动作之前,应该注意,保证测试头100和设备不要靠在可能干扰即将到来的平衡操作的任何外来物体或结构上。测试头100现在已经处在相对平衡状态,或者,更可能性处在不平衡状态。然后,如果还没有致动锁定器118就致动锁定器118,把测试头100锁定在某一位置上。在一些情况下,也许有必要先把测试头100移动到某一所需位置。这种移动可以通过手动装置来实现,或者,可选地,控制器可能配有适当的算法,以使它可以与反馈的位置相结合利用气压缸128。应注意,对于前述静态阻力而言,这样的控制算法可能难以实现。如果在应用锁定器118之前试图让测试头100停止在所需位置上这也是如此的。但是,适当的锁定器118还可以用作制动器,随着测试头100移动到所需位置,可以通过应用锁定器118来停止移动。A controller (not shown) may be provided to operate inlet valves 132 and 134 and lock 118 and receive feedback signals from position sensors 136a and 136b and force sensor 120 . For example, upon start-up, the pneumatic cylinder 128 is typically not pressurized for a test head 100 that is not docked with a handler. Before any control action, care should be taken to ensure that the test head 100 and the apparatus are not resting on any foreign objects or structures that may interfere with the upcoming balancing operation. The test head 100 is now in a relatively balanced state, or, more likely, an unbalanced state. Then, the lock 118 is actuated, if not already activated, to lock the test head 100 in a certain position. In some cases, it may be necessary to first move test head 100 to a desired position. This movement may be accomplished by manual means, or, alternatively, the controller may be equipped with appropriate algorithms so that it may utilize the pneumatic cylinder 128 in conjunction with the position feedback. It should be noted that such a control algorithm may be difficult to implement for the aforementioned stiction. This is also true if an attempt is made to stop the test head 100 in the desired position before the lock 118 is applied. However, suitable locks 118 may also be used as brakes by applying locks 118 to stop movement as test head 100 is moved to a desired position.

现在,对于锁定在某一位置上的测试头100,控制器对源自力传感器120的信号作出响应。力传感器120检测是否存在来自测试头100的围绕枢转轴102的显著不平衡力。力传感器120能够检测力的大小和方向。如果检测到显著的不平衡力,那么,调整缩回进口132和伸出进口134内的气压,以达到产生活塞130两端的压差的目的。活塞130两端的这种压差具有足够的大小,以把力传感器120测量的力减小到小于预定最大许可不平衡力。当完成了这项工作时,脱开锁定器118,测试头100相对于枢转轴102基本上是无重量的。现在,可以让测试头100绕着枢转轴102转动。可以按需要重复这个过程,使测试头100保持在相对于枢转轴102的平衡状态下。Now, with the test head 100 locked in a certain position, the controller responds to the signal from the force sensor 120 . The force sensor 120 detects the presence of a significant unbalanced force from the test head 100 about the pivot axis 102 . The force sensor 120 is capable of detecting the magnitude and direction of force. If a significant unbalanced force is detected, then the air pressures in the retraction inlet 132 and the extension inlet 134 are adjusted in order to create a pressure differential across the piston 130 . This pressure differential across piston 130 is of sufficient magnitude to reduce the force measured by force sensor 120 to less than a predetermined maximum allowable unbalanced force. When this is done, the lock 118 is disengaged and the test head 100 is substantially weightless with respect to the pivot axis 102 . The test head 100 can now be rotated about the pivot axis 102 . This process can be repeated as necessary to maintain the test head 100 in equilibrium with respect to the pivot axis 102 .

随着测试头100转动,活塞130也将运动。与机械弹簧类似,压差随活塞位移单调增大。施加在活塞130的给定侧上的气动力与体积成反比地增大。但是,对于气体体积的改变相对小的位移,等效弹性力随着位移近似线性地改变,等效“弹簧常数”是K。也就是说,F=Kx,此处,F是力的变化量,和x是活塞位置的变化量。最好,设法使K小一点,以便力在整个运动范围上不会相当大地改变。K部分由总气体体积相对于每个活塞位移增量的压力改变来确定,也就是说,由V和dP/dx决定的,此处,V是体积,而P是压力。随着活塞130靠近行程的一端,V变得很小,dP/dx变成指数增大,因此,K像F那样增大。如上所述,可以加入蓄能器(在图1(a)中未示出)。蓄能器用于显著增加可用的气体体积V,同时把dV/dx和dP/dx限制在可接受的值上。这样就达到了所谓的“软弹簧”效果,显而易见这是所需要的。As the test head 100 rotates, the piston 130 will also move. Like a mechanical spring, the differential pressure increases monotonically with piston displacement. The aerodynamic force exerted on a given side of the piston 130 increases inversely proportional to the volume. However, for displacements where the change in gas volume is relatively small, the equivalent elastic force varies approximately linearly with displacement, and the equivalent "spring constant" is K. That is, F=Kx, where F is the change in force and x is the change in piston position. Preferably, try to keep K small so that the force does not vary considerably over the range of motion. Part K is determined by the change in pressure of the total gas volume with respect to each increment of piston displacement, that is, by V and dP/dx, where V is volume and P is pressure. As the piston 130 approaches one end of the stroke, V becomes small and dP/dx becomes exponentially increasing, so K increases like F. As mentioned above, an accumulator (not shown in Figure 1(a)) may be added. Accumulators are used to significantly increase the available gas volume V while limiting dV/dx and dP/dx to acceptable values. This achieves the so-called "soft spring" effect, which is clearly desired.

理想的情况是,上述循环只进行一次,在对系统作某种改变之前不重复。但是,气压缸128的系统易发生气体泄漏,因此,在需要的时候,周期性地重复上述循环。经验证明,在需要重复循环之前,系统将保持足够的气体长达约10分钟以上。在典型的操作中,每隔几分钟(比方说,5到8分钟)该循环自动重复。此外,在典型的操作中,没有必要重复把测试头100移动到所需位置的步骤。除非测试头100已经遇到意外的硬障碍物或一些其它意外事故,它应该保持在它的许可运动范围之内,的确,如果测试头100现在处在执行理想功能所需的位置上,那么,非常不希望让测试头100移动回到预定所希望位置上。Ideally, the above loop should be done only once and not repeated until some change is made to the system. However, the system of pneumatic cylinders 128 is prone to gas leaks, so the above cycle is repeated periodically as needed. Experience has shown that the system will hold sufficient gas for up to about 10 minutes or more before the cycle needs to be repeated. In typical operation, this cycle repeats automatically every few minutes (say, 5 to 8 minutes). Furthermore, in typical operation, it is not necessary to repeat the steps of moving test head 100 to a desired location. Unless the test head 100 has encountered an unexpected hard obstacle or some other accident, it should remain within its permissible range of motion. Indeed, if the test head 100 is now in the position required to perform the desired function, then, It is highly undesirable to have the test head 100 move back to a predetermined desired position.

于是,如图15(a)所示,按照顺序,在示范性实施例中的操作顺序如下:Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15(a), in order, the operation sequence in the exemplary embodiment is as follows:

1.如步骤1501所示,锁住锁定器118。1. As shown in step 1501, lock the locker 118.

2.如步骤1502和1503所示,调整气压进口压力,直到力杆112中的力小于预定值为止。2. As shown in steps 1502 and 1503, adjust the air inlet pressure until the force in the force bar 112 is less than a predetermined value.

3.如步骤1504所示,解脱锁定器118。3. As shown in step 1504, the lock 118 is disengaged.

4.如步骤1505所示,在比要从气缸128中损失掉显著气体量的时间短的时间之后,转到步骤1501。4. As shown in step 1505, go to step 1501 after a time shorter than the time to lose a significant amount of gas from the cylinder 128.

这个序列使测试头100好像轴102直接穿过它的重心似的运转;我们将称此为“正常序列”。This sequence causes test head 100 to behave as if shaft 102 is passing directly through its center of gravity; we will refer to this as the "normal sequence".

在示范性的系统中,步骤1501、1502、1503和1504所需的时间小于4秒。这个步骤序列将被称为“力消除序列”。In the exemplary system, the time required for steps 1501, 1502, 1503 and 1504 is less than 4 seconds. This sequence of steps will be referred to as the "force elimination sequence".

仍然参照图1(a),两个止动环122和124或“运动限制器”附在力杆112上,使锁定器130处在它们之间。这样放置止动环122和124,使得当气压缸128中的活塞130居中时,止动环122和124离锁定器118的中心是等距离的。两个止动环122和124之间的距离A是比气压缸128中活塞130的总冲程小的某个合理值。因此,止动环122和124防止活塞130运行到气缸128的端部,并防止活塞130去掉力杆112和力传感器120的负载,从而使过程失真。它们同时用作测试头100的正向止动器(positive motion stop)。应注意,如果系统处在不平衡状态且锁定器118脱开,那么,两个止动环122或124必有一个靠在锁定器118上,且力杆112和力传感器承受和测量不平衡力。Still referring to FIG. 1( a ), two stop rings 122 and 124 or "motion limiters" are attached to the lever 112 with the lock 130 between them. The stop rings 122 and 124 are positioned such that the stop rings 122 and 124 are equidistant from the center of the locker 118 when the piston 130 in the pneumatic cylinder 128 is centered. The distance A between the two stop rings 122 and 124 is some reasonable value less than the total stroke of the piston 130 in the pneumatic cylinder 128 . Thus, stop rings 122 and 124 prevent piston 130 from running to the end of cylinder 128 and prevent piston 130 from unloading force rod 112 and force sensor 120, thereby distorting the process. They simultaneously serve as positive motion stops for the test head 100 . It should be noted that if the system is in an unbalanced state and the locker 118 is disengaged, then one of the two stop rings 122 or 124 must rest on the locker 118 and the force bar 112 and force sensor pick up and measure the unbalanced force .

可以把在图1(a)中未示出的其它控制功能加入上面系统中。例如,可以配备按钮,使操作者能够启动从上面列出的步骤1501或步骤1502开始的控制序列。可以加上指示灯,以便当锁住力杆112时提醒操作者;这将有助于操作者避免试图沿着轴102移动操纵器和/或正在执行步骤1502的时候试图进行对接。这样的尝试将在测试头100上产生附加不平衡力,而系统将错误地设法补偿它们。还可以把系统与对接机构中的传感器合并在一起,例如,以便在对接的时候,系统成为锁住的和/或禁用的。此外,最好探测测试头100是否处在准备对接的位置上,并让序列正好在对接之前得以执行。这将保证在实际发生对接的时候,不执行该序列,并且还保证在对接开始之前,最佳地补偿不平衡力。Other control functions not shown in Fig. 1(a) can be added to the above system. For example, a button may be provided to enable the operator to initiate the control sequence beginning with step 1501 or step 1502 listed above. An indicator light could be added to alert the operator when force bar 112 is locked; this would help the operator avoid attempting to move the manipulator along axis 102 and/or attempting to dock while step 1502 is being performed. Such an attempt would create additional unbalanced forces on the test head 100, and the system would erroneously try to compensate for them. It is also possible to incorporate the system with sensors in the docking mechanism, for example, so that when docked, the system becomes locked and/or disabled. In addition, it is preferable to detect whether the test head 100 is in a ready-to-dock position and to allow the sequence to be performed just prior to docking. This will ensure that the sequence is not carried out when docking actually occurs, and also ensures that unbalanced forces are optimally compensated before docking begins.

将被称为“锁定序列”的另一种控制循环在所选择的应用中是可能的和有用的。在锁定序列中,当测试头100远离将与之对接的设备(在图1(a)中未示出)时,保持测试头100相对于轴102所在大致中心位置处。这是“所需锁定位置”。当操纵测试头112进入准备对接的位置中时,调用力消除序列;也就是说,调整气压缸128中的气压,直到有效地消除了力杆112中的力为止。然后,解脱锁定器118,就可以进行对接了。通过手动或利用气压缸128和位置传感器136a和136b的自动控制,可以把测试头100放置在所需锁定位置上。也就是说,在启动时,对于没有对接的测试头100,控制器将首先使锁定器118不起作用。然后,把测试头100移动到相对于正在受控制的轴102的所需锁定位置上,例如,如位置传感器136a和136b所指的大致中心位置上。在自动控制的情况中,优选地把锁定器118用作制动器,强制测试头100停在所需锁定位置上,而不是只通过气动动作使其停止。Another control loop, which will be referred to as a "lock sequence", is possible and useful in selected applications. During the locking sequence, the test head 100 is maintained in a substantially centered position relative to the shaft 102 when the test head 100 is moved away from the device (not shown in FIG. 1( a )) with which it is to be interfaced. This is the "desired lock position". When the test head 112 is maneuvered into the ready-to-dock position, the force relief sequence is invoked; that is, the air pressure in the pneumatic cylinder 128 is adjusted until the force in the force rod 112 is effectively eliminated. Then, disengage the locking device 118, just can carry out docking. The test head 100 can be placed in the desired locked position either manually or automatically using pneumatic cylinder 128 and position sensors 136a and 136b. That is, at start-up, for an undocked test head 100, the controller will first disable the lock 118. The test head 100 is then moved to a desired locked position relative to the shaft 102 being controlled, for example, approximately centered as indicated by the position sensors 136a and 136b. In the case of automatic control, it is preferable to use the lock 118 as a brake, forcing the test head 100 to stop in the desired locked position, rather than stopping it only by pneumatic action.

当准备利用正常序列进行对接时,操纵测试头100进入准备对接位置,同时锁定器118松开,而气压缸128使测试头100保持平衡。取决于系统,当到达准备对接位置时,操作者或传感器将提供准备对接信号。根据这个信号,调用力消除序列,保证使测试头100尽可能地平衡。当使用锁定序列方法时,操纵测试头100进入准备对接位置,同时锁定器118接合;并且,当接收到准备对接信号时,只轮流执行上面列出的力消除序列的步骤1502和1503。现在,在每一种情况中,对于准备对接的、刚刚平衡的、并在所有轴上都可自由运动的测试头100,致动和接合对接机构,把测试头100拖入完全对接的位置中。在一些用途中,当提供已经完全对接的信号(由操作者或由传感器)时,再次应用锁定器118。在利用测试头测试集成电路的时候,仍然应用锁定器118。在这两种情况下,在未对接期间,仍然应用锁定器118,直到由操作者或传感器提供“clear-of-dock(清除对接)”信号为止。在这两种情况中,现在可以执行力消除序列了。在锁定序列的情况中,最后执行把测试头100放在所需中心位置上的过程,并且接合锁定器118。在正常序列的情况中,让锁定器118松开。When ready to dock using the normal sequence, the test head 100 is maneuvered into the ready-to-dock position with the lock 118 released and the pneumatic cylinder 128 balancing the test head 100 . Depending on the system, the operator or a sensor will provide a ready-to-dock signal when the ready-to-dock position is reached. Based on this signal, a force cancellation sequence is invoked to ensure that the test head 100 is as balanced as possible. When using the lock sequence method, the test head 100 is manipulated into the ready-to-dock position while the lock 118 is engaged; and, when the ready-to-dock signal is received, only steps 1502 and 1503 of the force release sequence listed above are performed in turn. Now, in each case, with the test head 100 ready for docking, just balanced, and free to move in all axes, the docking mechanism is actuated and engaged, pulling the test head 100 into the fully docked position . In some applications, the lock 118 is reapplied when a signal (either by the operator or by a sensor) that it has been fully docked is provided. The latch 118 is still used when testing the integrated circuit with the test head. In both cases, during undocking, the lock 118 remains applied until a "clear-of-dock" signal is provided by an operator or a sensor. In both cases, the force elimination sequence can now be performed. In the case of a locking sequence, the process of placing the test head 100 in the desired center position is performed last, and the lock 118 is engaged. In the case of a normal sequence, the lock 118 is let loose.

正如后面所述的那样,在一些应用中,在对接的时候,最好让锁定器118解开。后面还要提供有关对接的进一步信息。As will be described later, in some applications it may be desirable to have the latch 118 disengaged during docking. Further information on docking is provided later.

图1(b)显示了与参照图1(a)所述的系统相同的系统,除了在图1(b)中,轴承116a和116b耦合在一起,并在单点处与测试头100相连接之外。与之相反,在图1(a)中,轴承116a和116b分别与测试头100相连接。Figure 1(b) shows the same system as described with reference to Figure 1(a), except that in Figure 1(b), bearings 116a and 116b are coupled together and connected to test head 100 at a single point outside. In contrast, in FIG. 1( a ), bearings 116 a and 116 b are connected to test head 100 , respectively.

如此描述的平衡机构适用于图6(a)、6(b)和8(a)等。与这些图有关的讨论提供了有关控制气体和其它事项的更多信息和细节。The balancing mechanism thus described is applicable to Figs. 6(a), 6(b) and 8(a) etc. The discussion associated with these figures provides more information and details on control gases and other matters.

图1(c)示出了与参照图1(a)所示的系统相同的系统,除了在图1(c)中,与图1(a)所示的锁定器118和力传感器120不同,使用了包括压力传感器146a和146b的液压锁定器140之外,与图(1a)所示的系统一样,图1(c)中的系统可以实现如上所述的正常序列或如上所述的锁定序列。图4(b)提供了液压锁定单元140的更详细剖面图。这里,力杆112附在双作用液压缸140的活塞144上。FIG. 1(c) shows the same system as that shown with reference to FIG. 1(a), except that in FIG. Like the system shown in FIG. 1(a), the system in FIG. 1(c) can implement a normal sequence as described above or a locking sequence as described above, except that a hydraulic locker 140 including pressure sensors 146a and 146b is used. . FIG. 4( b ) provides a more detailed cross-sectional view of the hydraulic locking unit 140 . Here, the force rod 112 is attached to a piston 144 of a double-acting hydraulic cylinder 140 .

如图1(c)所示,液压缸140刚性地附在气压缸128上。液压缸140内充满适当的不可压缩流体(未示出)。在液压缸140内部,活塞144依活塞144两侧上的压差而移动。活塞144的每一侧包括经穿过控制阀142的导管152相互连接的流体进口154。在控制阀142一侧上的是压力传感器146a和146b,每一个与两个流体进口154之一相连接。As shown in FIG. 1( c ), hydraulic cylinder 140 is rigidly attached to pneumatic cylinder 128 . Hydraulic cylinder 140 is filled with a suitable incompressible fluid (not shown). Inside the hydraulic cylinder 140 , a piston 144 moves according to the pressure difference on both sides of the piston 144 . Each side of the piston 144 includes fluid inlets 154 interconnected via a conduit 152 through the control valve 142 . On one side of the control valve 142 are pressure transducers 146a and 146b , each connected to one of the two fluid inlets 154 .

由于液压流体基本上是不可压缩的,因此,当关闭控制阀142时,锁住了力杆112。当打开控制阀142时,力杆112可自由移动。运动仅由流过系统的流体流动妨碍。这种流动可以通过软管、导管、小孔的孔径、和阀门操作来控制。对流动的适当控制可以形成可能有好处的系统阻尼。尽管活塞144两侧上的压力在控制阀142关闭瞬间是相同的,但是,测试头100施加在力杆112上的不平衡力使活塞144一侧上的压力增大,而使活塞144另一侧上的压力减小。由此得出,由两个压力传感器146a和146b确定的压力差指示作用在力杆112上的力的大小和方向。Since hydraulic fluid is substantially incompressible, when the control valve 142 is closed, the force rod 112 is locked. When the control valve 142 is opened, the force rod 112 is free to move. Movement is impeded only by fluid flow through the system. This flow can be controlled by hose, conduit, orifice size, and valve operation. Proper control of flow can create system damping that can be beneficial. Although the pressure on both sides of the piston 144 is the same at the moment the control valve 142 is closed, the unbalanced force exerted by the test head 100 on the force rod 112 increases the pressure on one side of the piston 144 and increases the pressure on the other side of the piston 144. The pressure on the side is reduced. It follows that the pressure difference determined by the two pressure sensors 146a and 146b is indicative of the magnitude and direction of the force acting on the force rod 112 .

图1(c)所示的系统的操作就像针对图1(a)的系统所述的那样,除了致动液压阀142,而不是机械锁定器118,并由控制器读出和处理压力传感器输出以指示力杆112中的力之外。The operation of the system shown in Figure 1(c) is as described for the system of Figure 1(a), except the hydraulic valve 142 is actuated instead of the mechanical lock 118, and the pressure sensor is read and processed by the controller output to indicate force failure in the force bar 112.

在操作过程中,压力传感器146a和146b用于指示来自测试头100的不平衡力;把空气提供给气动缸128的缩回进口132和伸出进口134,以抵消压力传感器146a和146b检测的力。图4(a)提供了液压缸128的更详细的剖面图。通过进入了缩回进口132和伸出进口134的气压,在活塞130两端形成压力差。对于这个具有足够大小和方向的压力差,其目的是把力杆112中的力减小到小于预定最大许可不平衡力的大小。During operation, pressure sensors 146a and 146b are used to indicate unbalanced forces from test head 100; air is provided to retract inlet 132 and extend inlet 134 of pneumatic cylinder 128 to counteract the forces sensed by pressure sensors 146a and 146b. FIG. 4( a ) provides a more detailed cross-sectional view of hydraulic cylinder 128 . A pressure differential is created across piston 130 by air pressure entering retraction inlet 132 and extension inlet 134 . For this pressure differential to be of sufficient magnitude and direction, the goal is to reduce the force in the force bar 112 to a magnitude less than a predetermined maximum allowable unbalanced force.

在图1(c)中,使测试头100相对于枢转轴102保持平衡的过程如下。随着控制阀142打开,测试头100相对于它支承结构(未示出)处于所希望位置中,然后,关闭控制阀142。此时,由于控制阀142被关闭了,测试头100相对于枢转轴102被锁住。压力传感器146a和146b检测是否存在来自测试头100的围绕枢转轴102的显著不平衡力,压力传感器146a和146b能够探测力的大小和方向。如果检测到显著的不平衡力,那么,调整缩回进口132和伸出进口134内的气压,以达到扩大活塞130两端的压力差的目的。对于活塞130两端的压力差,其目的是压差足够大以把压力传感器146a和146b测量的力减小到小于预定最大许可不平衡力的大小。此时,控制阀142被打开,并且,测试头100沿着枢转轴102的方向基本上是无重量的。现在,测试头100可以沿着枢转轴102的方向移动。可以按需要重复这个过程,以便把测试头100保持在相对于枢转轴102的平衡状态。In FIG. 1( c ), the process of balancing the test head 100 with respect to the pivot axis 102 is as follows. With the control valve 142 open, the test head 100 is in the desired position relative to its support structure (not shown), and the control valve 142 is then closed. At this point, the test head 100 is locked relative to the pivot shaft 102 because the control valve 142 is closed. Pressure sensors 146a and 146b detect the presence of a significant unbalanced force from test head 100 about pivot axis 102, and pressure sensors 146a and 146b are capable of detecting the magnitude and direction of the force. If a significant unbalanced force is detected, the air pressures in the retraction inlet 132 and the extension inlet 134 are adjusted in order to increase the pressure differential across the piston 130 . With respect to the pressure differential across piston 130, the objective is for the pressure differential to be large enough to reduce the force measured by pressure sensors 146a and 146b to a magnitude less than a predetermined maximum allowable unbalanced force. At this point, the control valve 142 is opened and the test head 100 is substantially weightless in the direction of the pivot axis 102 . The test head 100 can now be moved in the direction of the pivot axis 102 . This process may be repeated as necessary to maintain test head 100 in equilibrium relative to pivot axis 102 .

图1(d)示出了与图1(c)所示的系统相同的系统,除了在图1(d)中,轴承116a和116b耦合在一起,并在单点处与测试头100相连接之外。与之相反,在图1(c)中,轴承116a和116b分别与测试头100相连接。Figure 1(d) shows the same system as that shown in Figure 1(c), except that in Figure 1(d), bearings 116a and 116b are coupled together and connected to test head 100 at a single point outside. In contrast, in FIG. 1(c), bearings 116a and 116b are connected to test head 100, respectively.

图2(a)示出了本发明的另外示范性实施例。图2(a)是示出把平衡单元110应用于安装在传统支架200上的测试头100的翻滚轴(枢转轴)102上的透视图。测试头100在翻滚轴102的两个端点上与支架200相连接。这里提供了具有两个端部的平衡单元110。平衡单元110的第一端部与测试头100相连接。平衡单元110的第二端部与支架200相连接。支架200是绕着翻滚轴102的测试头的支承结构。Figure 2(a) shows a further exemplary embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2( a ) is a perspective view showing application of the balance unit 110 to the roll axis (pivot axis) 102 of the test head 100 mounted on a conventional stand 200 . The test head 100 is connected to the bracket 200 at the two ends of the rolling axis 102 . There is provided a balancing unit 110 having two ends. A first end of the balancing unit 110 is connected to the test head 100 . The second end of the balance unit 110 is connected to the bracket 200 . Bracket 200 is a support structure for the test head around roll axis 102 .

如果测试头100的重心与翻滚轴102不重合,那么,测试头100将绕着翻滚轴102旋转,远离图2(a)所示的位置。平衡单元110将提供反力,使测试头100的重心相对于翻滚轴102保持平衡,以维持图2(a)中测试头100的位置。因此,由于测试头100现在相对于翻滚轴102基本上是无重量的,便于通过手动使测试头100绕着轴102的转动。If the center of gravity of the test head 100 does not coincide with the roll axis 102, then the test head 100 will rotate around the roll axis 102 away from the position shown in FIG. 2(a). The balance unit 110 will provide counter force to keep the center of gravity of the test head 100 balanced with respect to the roll axis 102 so as to maintain the position of the test head 100 in FIG. 2( a ). Thus, manual rotation of the test head 100 about the axis 102 is facilitated since the test head 100 is now substantially weightless relative to the roll axis 102 .

图2(b)示出了与图2(a)所示的系统相同的系统,除了在图2(b)中,轴承116a和116b耦合在一起,并在单点处与测试头100相连接之外。与之相反,在图2(a)中,轴承116a和116b分别与测试头100相连接。Figure 2(b) shows the same system as that shown in Figure 2(a), except that in Figure 2(b), bearings 116a and 116b are coupled together and connected to test head 100 at a single point outside. In contrast, in FIG. 2( a ), bearings 116 a and 116 b are connected to test head 100 , respectively.

图3(a)显示了本发明的另一个示范性实施例。图3(a)是示出把平衡单元110应用于测试头100的枢转轴102上的透视图。测试头100通过支承臂302和夹持凸缘300来支承。轴承305容纳在测试头100的内部。在测试头100的外部,支承臂302与夹持凸缘300相连接。这里提供了具有两个端部的平衡单元110。平衡单元110的第一端部与测试头100相连接。平衡单元110的第二端部与夹持凸缘300相连接。夹持凸缘300是枢转轴102的支承结构。Figure 3(a) shows another exemplary embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3( a ) is a perspective view showing the application of the balancing unit 110 to the pivot shaft 102 of the test head 100 . The test head 100 is supported by a support arm 302 and a clamping flange 300 . Bearings 305 are accommodated inside the test head 100 . On the outside of the test head 100 , the support arm 302 is connected to the clamping flange 300 . There is provided a balancing unit 110 having two ends. A first end of the balancing unit 110 is connected to the test head 100 . The second end of the balancing unit 110 is connected to the clamping flange 300 . The clamping flange 300 is a support structure for the pivot shaft 102 .

如果测试头100的重心与枢转轴102不重合,那么,测试头100将绕着穿过轴承305的枢转轴102旋转,远离图3(a)所示的位置。平衡单元110将提供反力,以使测试头100的重心相对于枢转轴102平衡,维持图3(a)中测试头100的位置。因此,由于测试头100现在相对于枢转轴102基本上是无重量的,便于通过手动使测试头100运动。If the center of gravity of the test head 100 does not coincide with the pivot axis 102, then the test head 100 will rotate about the pivot axis 102 passing through the bearing 305, away from the position shown in FIG. 3(a). The balance unit 110 will provide a reaction force to balance the center of gravity of the test head 100 relative to the pivot axis 102 and maintain the position of the test head 100 in FIG. 3( a ). Manual movement of the test head 100 is thus facilitated since the test head 100 is now substantially weightless relative to the pivot axis 102 .

图3(b)示出了与图3(a)所示的系统相同的系统,除了在图2(b)中,轴承116a和116b耦合在一起,在单点处与测试头100相连接之外。与之相反,在图3(a)中,轴承116a和116b分别与测试头100相连接。Figure 3(b) shows the same system as that shown in Figure 3(a), except that in Figure 2(b), bearings 116a and 116b are coupled outside. In contrast, in FIG. 3( a ), bearings 116 a and 116 b are connected to test head 100 , respectively.

尽管已经就与单根轴102耦合的单个平衡单元110对本发明作了描述,但是,两个或更多个单元可以应用于单根轴或多根轴上。当使用多于一个的单元时,它们可以相互作用。整个控制方案最好考虑到这种潜在相互作用。例如,如果两个单元用于控制两个独立的枢转轴,那么,应该每次操纵一个。可以设想,三个或更多个单元可以成功地用于控制与如在发明背景中描述的球轴承一起安装的测试头。Although the invention has been described with respect to a single balancing unit 110 coupled to a single shaft 102, two or more units may be applied to a single shaft or to multiple shafts. When more than one unit is used, they can interact. The overall control scheme should preferably take this potential interaction into account. For example, if two units are used to control two independent pivot axes, they should be manipulated one at a time. It is contemplated that three or more units could be used successfully to control a test head mounted with ball bearings as described in the Background of the Invention.

图5(a)示出了根据本发明一个示范性实施例的、适用于不平衡力很小或没有不平衡力,且柔顺力主要由摩擦引起的水平轴的基本柔顺驱动机构512。在图5(a)中,平板504和平板500代表用在如,例如授予Holt等人、名称为“测试头操纵器(TEST HEAD MANIPULATOR)”的PCT国际申请第US00/00704号所述的、具有一根或多根内置的水平运动轴的操纵器基座的结构中的平板。如图所示,两个线性导轨503a和503b相互平行布置,并刚性地附在平板504的上表面上。两对滚珠滑块,第一对包括滚珠滑块502a和502b,而第二对包括滚珠滑块502c和502d,附在平板500的底面上。第一对滚珠滑块502a和502b布置成使它们与线性导轨503a可滑动地耦合,第二对滚珠滑块502c和502d类似地布置成与线性导轨503b可滑动地耦合。于是,平板500与平板504平行,并且在平板504的上面,且平板500可以沿着由线性导轨503a和503b限定的轴,相对于平板504作线性运动。这样的布置可以在测试头操纵器基座中实现内外运动或左右运动。还应该注意到,这样的布置也适用于如,例如,授予Holt等人、名称为“测试头操纵器(TEST HEADMANIPULATOR)”的PCT国际申请第US00/00704号所述的、由围绕垂直轴旋转水平平板相对于水平面引起的摇摆运动。如图5(a)所示,运动阻力是由与滚珠滑块502a、502b、502c、和502d、和线性导轨503a和503b相关的摩擦力造成的。为了方便起见,如图5(a)所示,把平板50沿着线性导轨503a和503b,向朝着线性致动器508的方向的运动当作向“内”方向的运动,而把相反方向的运动当作向“外”方向的运动。Fig. 5(a) shows a substantially compliant drive mechanism 512 for a horizontal axis where there is little or no unbalanced force and the compliant force is mainly caused by friction, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 5(a), flat panel 504 and flat panel 500 are representative of those used in, for example, PCT International Application No. US00/00704 to Holt et al., entitled "TEST HEAD MANIPULATOR", A plate in a structure with one or more built-in axes of horizontal motion for a manipulator base. As shown, two linear guides 503 a and 503 b are arranged parallel to each other and are rigidly attached to the upper surface of the plate 504 . Two pairs of ball sliders, a first pair including ball sliders 502a and 502b and a second pair including ball sliders 502c and 502d, are attached to the bottom surface of plate 500 . The first pair of ball sliders 502a and 502b are arranged such that they are slidably coupled to the linear guide 503a, and the second pair of ball sliders 502c and 502d are similarly arranged to be slidably coupled to the linear guide 503b. Thus, the plate 500 is parallel to and above the plate 504, and the plate 500 can move linearly relative to the plate 504 along the axis defined by the linear guides 503a and 503b. Such an arrangement allows for in-and-out motion or side-to-side motion in the test head manipulator base. It should also be noted that such an arrangement is also suitable for use with devices that rotate about a vertical axis as described, for example, in PCT International Application No. US00/00704 to Holt et al., entitled "TEST HEADNIPULATOR". Rocking motion caused by a horizontal plate relative to a horizontal plane. As shown in Figure 5(a), the resistance to motion is caused by the frictional forces associated with the ball sliders 502a, 502b, 502c, and 502d, and the linear guides 503a and 503b. For convenience, as shown in Figure 5 (a), the movement of the flat plate 50 along the linear guide rails 503a and 503b towards the direction of the linear actuator 508 is regarded as the movement in the "inward" direction, and the movement in the opposite direction The movement of is regarded as the movement in the "outward" direction.

包括致动器电机510的、线性致动器508的静止元件506附在平板504上。通常,线性致动器508包括由电动机驱动的滚珠丝杠机构,且驱动部件为滚珠丝杠。但是,只要适合于给定应用,也可以使用其它机构和/或螺纹类型。在图5(a)中,线性致动器508的驱动部件是致动器轴514,当向致动器电机510供能时,它从静止元件506伸出和/或缩回到静止元件506中。致动器轴514的运动方向由致动器电机510的旋转方向决定。如所示,线性致动器508布置成使致动器轴514在与线性导轨503a和503b平行的平面内移动。A stationary element 506 including an actuator motor 510 , a linear actuator 508 is attached to the plate 504 . Typically, the linear actuator 508 includes a ball screw mechanism driven by an electric motor, and the driving component is a ball screw. However, other mechanisms and/or thread types may be used as appropriate for a given application. In FIG. 5(a), the driving component of the linear actuator 508 is the actuator shaft 514, which extends and/or retracts from the stationary element 506 when power is applied to the actuator motor 510. middle. The direction of motion of the actuator shaft 514 is determined by the direction of rotation of the actuator motor 510 . As shown, the linear actuator 508 is arranged to move the actuator shaft 514 in a plane parallel to the linear guides 503a and 503b.

致动器轴514的顶端有一个其方向与致动器轴514的轴向成名义直角的小孔。U形夹516和穿过致动器轴514的小孔的U形夹插销518将致动器轴514与柔顺轴520耦合在一起。柔顺轴520的轴优选与致动器轴514的轴基本上同轴;但是,本领域的普通技术人员应该明白,其它布置也是可以的。The top end of the actuator shaft 514 has a small hole whose direction is nominally at right angles to the axial direction of the actuator shaft 514 . A clevis 516 and a clevis pin 518 passing through an aperture in the actuator shaft 514 couple the actuator shaft 514 and the compliant shaft 520 together. The axis of the compliant shaft 520 is preferably substantially coaxial with the axis of the actuator shaft 514; however, one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that other arrangements are possible.

柔顺轴520穿过锁定器118;锁定器118刚性地附在平板500上。锁定器118可以是包括电操纵型和气动操纵型在内的许多不同类型之一。当接合锁定器118时,限制平板500相对于柔顺轴520,并因而相对于平板504运动。因此,随着锁定器118被接合,线性致动器508可以用于相对于平板504沿着导轨503a和503b定位平板500。当未接合锁定器118时,平板500相对于柔顺轴520和平板504自由运动;因此,实现了平板500相对于平板504的柔顺运动。由于这种机构引起的相关柔顺力包括克服线性导轨503a和503b、和滚珠滑块502a、502b、502c、和502d的摩擦,加上柔顺轴520穿过锁定器118运动的摩擦所需的力。应注意,在特定的操纵器和用途中,另外还可能存在一些力,但是,这些与如上所述的机构无关。The compliant shaft 520 passes through the lock 118 ; the lock 118 is rigidly attached to the plate 500 . The lock 118 may be one of many different types including electrically and pneumatically operated. When the lock 118 is engaged, the movement of the pad 500 relative to the compliance axis 520 , and thus relative to the pad 504 , is restricted. Thus, with the lock 118 engaged, the linear actuator 508 can be used to position the tablet 500 relative to the tablet 504 along the rails 503a and 503b. When the lock 118 is not engaged, the pad 500 is free to move relative to the compliance axis 520 and the pad 504; thus, compliant motion of the pad 500 relative to the pad 504 is achieved. The associated compliance forces due to this mechanism include the force required to overcome the friction of the linear guides 503a and 503b, and the ball sliders 502a, 502b, 502c, and 502d, plus the friction of the movement of the compliance shaft 520 through the locker 118. It should be noted that in a particular manipulator and application, some forces may additionally be present, however, these are not relevant to the mechanism described above.

伸出的柔顺止动器522和缩回的柔顺止动器524都刚性地附在柔顺轴520上,在锁定器118的每侧上各有一个。如图5(a)所示,伸出的柔顺止动器522位于锁定器118和U形夹516之间;而缩回的柔顺止动器524位于柔顺轴520a的远端和锁定器118之间。这些柔顺止动器522和524作用为限制柔顺轴520相对于平板500的游动,或者,等效地,限制平板500相对于柔顺轴520的游动。如果未接合锁定器118,平板500可以在外力的驱动下,在两个柔顺止动器522和524之间的距离“D”减去锁定器118的宽度“W”所限定的游动范围上运动,并且,这也限定了运动的柔顺范围。也就是说,随着锁定器118解脱(且优选关闭线性致动器508),平板500可以在足以克服上述柔顺力的外力的驱动下,在由D-W限定的距离上沿着线性导轨503a和503b运动。Both extended compliant stops 522 and retracted compliant stops 524 are rigidly attached to the compliant shaft 520 , one on each side of the lock 118 . As shown in Figure 5(a), the extended compliant stop 522 is located between the lock 118 and the clevis 516; and the retracted compliant stop 524 is located between the distal end of the compliant shaft 520a and the lock 118 between. These compliance stops 522 and 524 act to limit the movement of the compliance axis 520 relative to the pad 500 , or, equivalently, limit the movement of the pad 500 relative to the compliance axis 520 . If the lock 118 is not engaged, the tablet 500 can be driven by an external force over a range of play defined by the distance "D" between the two compliant stops 522 and 524 minus the width "W" of the lock 118 movement, and this also limits the compliant range of movement. That is, with the lock 118 disengaged (and preferably closing the linear actuator 508), the panel 500 can be driven along the linear guide rails 503a and 503b over the distance defined by D-W under the external force sufficient to overcome the above-mentioned compliance force. sports.

一般说来,与滚珠滑块502a、502b、502c、和502d、及线性导轨503a和503b有关的摩擦大于柔顺轴520和锁定器118之间的摩擦。于是,如果锁定器118解脱,并且向线性致动器电机520供能,那么,柔顺轴520相对于锁定器118和平板500运动。如果向致动器电机510供能,以便致动器轴514从静止元件506伸出,那么,伸出的柔顺止动器522沿着锁定器118的方向运动。如果致动器电机510未关闭,那么,随着到达柔顺范围的末端,伸出的柔顺止动器522靠在锁定器118上;然后,致动器轴514的进一步伸出使平板500相对于平板504向“外”方向移动。另外,如果向致动器电机510供能,使致动器轴514缩回到静止元件506中,那么,缩回的柔顺止动器524沿着锁定器118的方向运动。如果致动器电机510未关闭,那么,随着到达柔顺范围的末端,缩回的柔顺止动器524靠在锁定器118上;然后,致动器轴514的进一步缩回使平板500相对于平板504向“内”方向移动。In general, the friction associated with ball sliders 502a, 502b, 502c, and 502d, and linear guides 503a and 503b is greater than the friction between compliant shaft 520 and lock 118 . Thus, if the lock 118 is disengaged and the linear actuator motor 520 is energized, the compliant shaft 520 moves relative to the lock 118 and the plate 500 . If the actuator motor 510 is powered such that the actuator shaft 514 extends from the stationary element 506 , the extended compliant stop 522 moves in the direction of the lock 118 . If the actuator motor 510 is not closed, then, as the end of the compliance range is reached, the extended compliance stop 522 rests against the lock 118; then, further extension of the actuator shaft 514 causes the flat panel 500 to Plate 504 moves in an "out" direction. Additionally, if the actuator motor 510 is powered to retract the actuator shaft 514 into the stationary element 506 , the retracted compliant stop 524 moves in the direction of the lock 118 . If the actuator motor 510 is not turned off, then, as the end of the compliance range is reached, the retracted compliance stop 524 rests against the lock 118; then, further retraction of the actuator shaft 514 causes the tablet 500 to move relative to the Plate 504 moves in an "inward" direction.

在操作过程中,最好把柔顺轴520定位和锁定在它相对于平板500的运动范围内、某个预选点的小邻域内的位置上。通常,这个点是两个柔顺止动器522和524之间的中点;但是,存在着使这个点位于更靠近两个柔顺止动器522或524的某一个的位置上更优选的应用。把这个邻域称为“柔顺中性区域”。柔顺中性区域通常是整个柔顺范围的一小部分;例如,40到50mm总柔顺范围当中的±3或4mm。During operation, compliance axis 520 is preferably positioned and locked in a position within a small neighborhood of a preselected point within its range of motion relative to tablet 500 . Typically, this point is midway between the two compliant stops 522 and 524; however, there are applications where it is more preferable to have this point located closer to either of the two compliant stops 522 or 524. Call this neighborhood the "compliant neutral region". The compliance neutral region is usually a small fraction of the overall compliance range; for example, ±3 or 4mm of the 40 to 50mm total compliance range.

当锁定器118位于柔顺中性区域和伸出的柔顺止动器522之间时,一般称它处在“柔顺伸出区域”中。类似地,当锁定器118位于柔顺中性区域和缩回的柔顺止动器524之间时,一般称它处在“柔顺缩回区域”中。When the lock 118 is located between the compliant neutral region and the extended compliant stop 522, it is generally said to be in the "compliant extension region". Similarly, when the lock 118 is located between the compliant neutral region and the retracted compliant stop 524, it is generally said to be in a "compliant retracted region".

如图5(a)所示,把位置传感器528合并进来,以探测平板500相对于柔顺轴520的相对位置。位置传感器528可以是从精确编码器、电位计等到限位开关、接近传感器、测距仪等的组合范围内的许多种已知类型的任何一种。作为最起码的能力,位置传感器528应该指示机构当前处在三个范围的哪一个中:柔顺伸出、柔顺中性、还是柔顺缩回。As shown in FIG. 5( a ), a position sensor 528 is incorporated to detect the relative position of the plate 500 with respect to the compliance axis 520 . Position sensor 528 may be any of a number of known types ranging from precision encoders, potentiometers, etc., to combinations of limit switches, proximity sensors, range finders, and the like. As a minimum capability, the position sensor 528 should indicate which of three ranges the mechanism is currently in: compliant extension, compliant neutral, or compliant retract.

现在描述柔顺机构512的操作。首先,解脱锁定器118。然后,将线性致动器508与位置传感器528结合在一起使用以把柔顺轴520定位在预定柔顺中性位置上。现在,锁住锁定器118,并且,线性致动器508用于把平板500定位在相对于平板504的所需位置上。例如,所需位置可以是将对接测试头或负载(未示出)的位置。现在,关闭线性致动器电机510,并解脱锁定器118。现在,随着测试头或负载被驱使进入它的最后对接位置时,平板500可以在外力,例如,对接机构产生的力的驱动下以柔顺方式移动。根据特定的应用和/或用户偏好,一旦到达最后对接位置,锁定器118可以或不重新锁住。同样,根据特定的应用和/或用户偏好,在解开测试头或负载的同时,锁定器118可以或不锁住。但是,一旦脱离,在通过线性致动器508启动平板500的运动之前,应该根据前面的过程,把柔顺轴520放置并锁定在柔顺中性位置中。The operation of the compliance mechanism 512 is now described. First, the locker 118 is released. Linear actuator 508 is then used in conjunction with position sensor 528 to position compliant shaft 520 at a predetermined compliant neutral position. Now, the latch 118 is locked and the linear actuator 508 is used to position the tablet 500 in the desired position relative to the tablet 504 . For example, the desired location may be where a test head or load (not shown) will be docked. Now, the linear actuator motor 510 is turned off and the lock 118 is disengaged. Now, as the test head or load is driven into its final docked position, the plate 500 can move in a compliant manner driven by an external force, eg, a force generated by the docking mechanism. Depending on the particular application and/or user preference, the lock 118 may or may not re-lock once the final docked position is reached. Also, the lock 118 may or may not be locked while the test head or load is unlatched, depending on the particular application and/or user preference. However, once disengaged, the compliant shaft 520 should be placed and locked in the compliant neutral position according to the previous procedure before initiating motion of the pad 500 via the linear actuator 508 .

图5(b)示出了图5(a)的可替代实施例。在图(b)中,液压机构513取代图5(a)的锁定器118和柔顺止动器522和524。尤其是,双作用液压缸140的主体附在平板500上且它的缸筒的轴线与线性致动器508的致动器轴514的轴在一个平面内。并且,正如图5(b)所示的那样,平板50沿着线性导轨503a和503b在朝着线性致动器508的方向的运动是向“内”方向的运动,而相反方向的运动是向“外”方向的运动。缸140离线性致动器508最远的一端是“伸出端”532,而缸140最接近线性致动器508的一端是“缩回端”533。活塞144位于液压缸140的内部;并且,活塞144与轴520b相连接,轴520b与液压缸140的缸筒同轴,并且通过液压缸140的缩回端533伸出。轴520b用作柔顺轴520的一部分,并且,它通过参照图5(a)所述的U形夹516和U型夹插销518与致动器轴514相连接。在图5(b)中,附在活塞144的相对侧的第二轴520c通过液压缸140的伸出端532延伸。这个第二轴520c用作柔顺轴520的延伸部,并且,图5(b)中的位置传感器探测这个轴520c相对于平板500的位置。但是,把系统布置成使位置传感器528可以与第一轴520b结合在一起操作以节省配备第二轴520c的可能额外成本也是可行的。Figure 5(b) shows an alternative embodiment to Figure 5(a). In Figure (b), the hydraulic mechanism 513 replaces the locker 118 and the compliant stops 522 and 524 of Figure 5(a). In particular, the body of the double-acting hydraulic cylinder 140 is attached to the plate 500 and the axis of its cylinder is in a plane with the axis of the actuator shaft 514 of the linear actuator 508 . And, as shown in Figure 5 (b), the movement of the panel 50 along the linear guides 503a and 503b in the direction towards the linear actuator 508 is the movement in the "inward" direction, while the movement in the opposite direction is the movement in the direction Movement in the "outside" direction. The end of the cylinder 140 furthest from the linear actuator 508 is the “extended end” 532 , while the end of the cylinder 140 closest to the linear actuator 508 is the “retracted end” 533 . The piston 144 is located inside the hydraulic cylinder 140 ; and, the piston 144 is connected to the shaft 520 b which is coaxial with the cylinder barrel of the hydraulic cylinder 140 and protrudes through the retracted end 533 of the hydraulic cylinder 140 . Shaft 520b serves as part of compliant shaft 520 and it is connected to actuator shaft 514 via clevis 516 and clevis pin 518 as described with reference to Figure 5(a). In FIG. 5( b ), a second shaft 520 c attached to the opposite side of the piston 144 extends through the extended end 532 of the hydraulic cylinder 140 . This second axis 520c serves as an extension of the compliant axis 520, and the position sensor in FIG. 5(b) detects the position of this axis 520c relative to the plate 500. However, it is also feasible to arrange the system so that the position sensor 528 can operate in conjunction with the first shaft 520b to save the possible additional cost of providing the second shaft 520c.

液压缸140两端的每一个都配有使适当的液压流体流入或流出缸140的端口154。两个端口154通过导管152经由阀门142从外部相互连接。阀门142设置成:当打开它时,流体可以自由地从一个端口流出,流入另一个端口;而当关闭它时,流体不能在两个端口之间流动。整个机构充满适当的、基本上不可压缩的流体。流体的选择应该考虑到如果在系统中产生泄漏会发生的可能有害的作用。此外,由于系统往往要放在温度比水的冰点低得多的飞机货舱中装运,流体应该具有低的凝固点。由于流体是不可压缩的,很显然,当关闭阀门142时,活塞不能沿着任一方向运动。但是,随着阀门142打开,由于流体可以通过端口154、导管152、和打开的阀门142所提供的路径自由地从活塞144的一侧流动到另一侧,因此,活塞144能够移动。当关闭阀门142时,基本上锁住了柔顺轴520相对于液压缸140和其上附着缸140的平板500的运动。因此,随着阀门142被关闭,线性致动器508的操作使平板500沿着线性导轨503a和503b限定的轴相对于平板504运动。但是,随着阀门142被打开,平板500可以在外力的驱动下,在活塞144的有效冲程所定义的游动范围(基本上等于缸140的两端壁之间的内距离减去活塞144的厚度)内,沿着线性导轨503a和503b限定的轴移动;并且,这限定了运动的柔顺范围。也就是说,随着阀门142打开(且优选关闭线性致动器电机510),平板500可以在外力的驱动下,在通过活塞144的有效冲程限定的距离上,沿着线性导轨503a和503b运动。Each of the two ends of the hydraulic cylinder 140 is provided with a port 154 to allow appropriate hydraulic fluid to flow into or out of the cylinder 140 . The two ports 154 are externally connected to each other by a conduit 152 via a valve 142 . Valve 142 is configured such that when it is open, fluid can freely flow out of one port and into the other port, and when it is closed, fluid cannot flow between the two ports. The entire mechanism is filled with a suitable, substantially incompressible fluid. The choice of fluid should take into account the possible deleterious effects that could occur if a leak were to develop in the system. Furthermore, since systems tend to be shipped in aircraft cargo holds at temperatures well below the freezing point of water, the fluid should have a low freezing point. Since fluid is incompressible, it is clear that when valve 142 is closed the piston cannot move in either direction. However, with valve 142 open, piston 144 is able to move because fluid is free to flow from one side of piston 144 to the other through the path provided by port 154, conduit 152, and open valve 142. When valve 142 is closed, the movement of compliant shaft 520 relative to hydraulic cylinder 140 and plate 500 to which cylinder 140 is attached is substantially locked. Thus, with valve 142 closed, operation of linear actuator 508 moves plate 500 relative to plate 504 along the axis defined by linear guides 503a and 503b. However, as the valve 142 is opened, the plate 500 can be driven by an external force to move within the range defined by the effective stroke of the piston 144 (substantially equal to the inner distance between the two end walls of the cylinder 140 minus the distance of the piston 144). thickness), moves along the axis defined by the linear guides 503a and 503b; and, this defines a compliant range of motion. That is, with valve 142 open (and preferably closed linear actuator motor 510), plate 500 can be driven by an external force along linear guides 503a and 503b over a distance defined by the effective stroke of piston 144. .

一般来说,随着阀门142被打开,与活塞144在液压缸140中运动有关的摩擦和其它力小于与线性导轨503a和503b、和滚珠滑块502a、502b、502c、和502d有关的摩擦力。于是,如果阀门142被打开且向线性致动器电机510供能,那么,柔顺轴520相对于液压缸140和平板500运动。如果向致动器电机510供能以使致动器轴514从静止元件506伸出来,那么,活塞144朝着缸的伸出端532运动。现在,如果没有关闭致动器电机510,那么,随着到达柔顺范围的末端,活塞144靠在缸140的伸出端532的端壁上。然后,致动器轴514的进一步伸出使平板500相对于平板504向“外”方向移动。如果向致动器电机510供能,使致动器轴514缩回到静止元件506中,那么,活塞144朝着缸140的缩回端533移动。现在,如果致动器电机510没有关闭,那么,随着到达柔顺范围的末端,活塞144靠在缸140的缩回端533的端壁上。此外,致动器轴514的进一步缩回使平板500相对于平板504向“内”方向移动。In general, with valve 142 open, the friction and other forces associated with movement of piston 144 within hydraulic cylinder 140 are less than the frictional forces associated with linear guides 503a and 503b, and ball sliders 502a, 502b, 502c, and 502d . Thus, if valve 142 is opened and linear actuator motor 510 is energized, compliant shaft 520 moves relative to hydraulic cylinder 140 and plate 500 . If the actuator motor 510 is powered to extend the actuator shaft 514 from the stationary member 506, the piston 144 moves toward the extended end 532 of the cylinder. Now, if the actuator motor 510 is not turned off, then, as the end of the compliance range is reached, the piston 144 bears against the end wall of the extended end 532 of the cylinder 140 . Further extension of the actuator shaft 514 then moves the pad 500 in an “outboard” direction relative to the pad 504 . If the actuator motor 510 is powered to retract the actuator shaft 514 into the stationary element 506 , the piston 144 moves toward the retracted end 533 of the cylinder 140 . Now, if the actuator motor 510 is not turned off, then, as the end of the compliance range is reached, the piston 144 bears against the end wall of the retracted end 533 of the cylinder 140 . Additionally, further retraction of the actuator shaft 514 moves the pad 500 in an “inward” direction relative to the pad 504 .

在操作过程中,最好把活塞144(及与它相连的柔顺轴520)定位和锁定在它相对于平板500的运动范围内、某个预选点的小邻域内的位置上。通常,这个点是缸140两个端点之间的中点;但是,存在使这个点位于更靠近两个端点的某一个的位置上更优选的应用。我们将再次把这个邻域称为“柔顺中性区域”。柔顺中性区域通常是整个柔顺范围的一小部分;例如,40到50mm总柔顺范围当中的±3或4mm。During operation, the piston 144 (and its associated compliant shaft 520) is preferably positioned and locked in a position within a small neighborhood of a preselected point within its range of motion relative to the plate 500. Typically, this point is midway between the two endpoints of the cylinder 140; however, there are applications where it is more preferable to have this point located closer to either of the two endpoints. We will again refer to this neighborhood as the "compliant neutral region". The compliance neutral region is usually a small fraction of the overall compliance range; for example, ±3 or 4mm of the 40 to 50mm total compliance range.

当活塞144位于柔顺中性区域和缸140的伸出端532之间时,一般认为它处在“柔顺伸出区域”中。类似地,当活塞144位于柔顺中性区域和缸140的缩回端533之间时,一般认为它处在“柔顺缩回区域”中。When the piston 144 is located between the compliant neutral region and the extended end 532 of the cylinder 140, it is generally considered to be in the "compliant extended region". Similarly, when the piston 144 is located between the compliant neutral region and the retracted end 533 of the cylinder 140, it is generally considered to be in a "compliant retracting region".

正如图5(a)那样,合并有位置传感器528,以探测平板500相对于柔顺轴520的相对位置。位置传感器528可以是在从精确编码器、电位计等到限位开关、接近传感器、测距仪等的组合的范围内的许多种已知类型的任何一种。作为最起码的能力,位置传感器528应该指示机构当前处在三个范围的哪一个中:柔顺伸出、柔顺中性、还是柔顺缩回。As in FIG. 5( a ), a position sensor 528 is incorporated to detect the relative position of the panel 500 with respect to the compliance axis 520 . Position sensor 528 may be any of a number of known types ranging from precision encoders, potentiometers, etc. to combinations of limit switches, proximity sensors, range finders, and the like. As a minimum capability, the position sensor 528 should indicate which of three ranges the mechanism is currently in: compliant extension, compliant neutral, or compliant retract.

现在描述机构513的操作。首先,打开阀门142。然后,将线性致动器508与位置传感器528结合使用,以将活塞144定位在预定柔顺中性位置上。现在,关闭阀门142,把活塞144和柔顺轴520锁定在柔顺中性位置中,并且,线性致动器508用于把平板500定位在相对于平板504的所需位置上。例如,所需位置可以是将对接测试头或负载(未示出)的位置。现在,关闭线性致动器508且打开阀门142。现在,当驱使测试头或负载进入它的最后对接位置时,平板500可以在外力,例如,对接机构产生的力的驱动下以柔顺方式移动。根据特定的应用和/或用户偏好,一旦到达最后对接位置,阀门142可以关闭或不关闭。此外,还根据特定的应用和/或用户偏好,在解开测试头或负载的同时,阀门142可以关闭或不关闭。但是,一旦脱离,在通过线性致动器508启动平板500的运动之前,应该根据前面的过程,把柔顺轴520放置和锁定在柔顺中性位置中。The operation of mechanism 513 is now described. First, valve 142 is opened. Linear actuator 508 is then used in conjunction with position sensor 528 to position piston 144 in a predetermined compliant neutral position. Valve 142 is now closed, piston 144 and compliant shaft 520 are locked in the compliant neutral position, and linear actuator 508 is used to position plate 500 in the desired position relative to plate 504 . For example, the desired location may be where a test head or load (not shown) will be docked. Now, linear actuator 508 is closed and valve 142 is opened. Now, when the test head or load is driven into its final docked position, the plate 500 can move in a compliant manner under external forces, eg, forces generated by the docking mechanism. Depending on the particular application and/or user preference, valve 142 may or may not be closed once the final docked position is reached. Additionally, valve 142 may or may not be closed while uncoupling the test head or load, also depending on the particular application and/or user preference. However, once disengaged, the compliant shaft 520 should be placed and locked in the compliant neutral position according to the previous procedure before initiating motion of the pad 500 via the linear actuator 508 .

图5(c)示出了用于不平衡力很小或没有且柔顺力主要由摩擦引起的水平轴的另一种示范性柔顺驱动机构550。两个平板500和504、线性导轨503a和503b、滚珠滑块502a、502b、502c和502d、和线性致动器508的布置和目的基本上与参照图5(a)所述的相同。另外,柔顺轴520以与图5(a)所示的相似方式,通过U形夹516和U形夹插销518与致动器轴514相连接。如图5(c)所示,平板50沿着线性导轨503a和503b,向朝着线性致动器508的方向的运动是向“内”方向的运动,而相反方向的运动是向“外”方向的运动。Figure 5(c) shows another exemplary compliant drive mechanism 550 for a horizontal axis where there is little or no unbalanced force and the compliant force is mainly due to friction. The arrangement and purpose of the two plates 500 and 504, linear guides 503a and 503b, ball sliders 502a, 502b, 502c and 502d, and linear actuator 508 are basically the same as described with reference to FIG. 5(a). Additionally, the compliant shaft 520 is connected to the actuator shaft 514 via the clevis 516 and the clevis pin 518 in a similar manner to that shown in FIG. 5( a ). As shown in Figure 5(c), the movement of the panel 50 along the linear guide rails 503a and 503b towards the direction of the linear actuator 508 is the movement in the "inward" direction, while the movement in the opposite direction is "outward". direction of movement.

柔顺轴520穿过内安装支架554和外安装支架552,这两个支架刚性地附在平板500的下侧,内安装支架554比外安装支架552更接近线性致动器508。最好,柔顺轴520可以相对于安装支架552和544,沿着内外方向的轴自由运动,而滚珠滑块502a、502b、502c和502d可以用于完成这个任务。柔顺止动器556在位于两个安装支架552和554之间的位置上刚性地附在柔顺轴520上。The compliant shaft 520 passes through an inner mounting bracket 554 that is rigidly attached to the underside of the tablet 500 and an outer mounting bracket 552 that is closer to the linear actuator 508 than the outer mounting bracket 552 . Preferably, compliant shaft 520 is free to move along the in-out axis relative to mounting brackets 552 and 544, and ball sliders 502a, 502b, 502c, and 502d can be used to accomplish this task. A compliance stop 556 is rigidly attached to the compliance shaft 520 at a location between the two mounting brackets 552 and 554 .

外定心致动器558的静止元件附在外安装支架552上,而内定心致动器560的静止元件附在内安装支架554上。这两个定心致动器558和560每一个的驱动部件是一旦适当地对致动器558或560供能,就从静止元件伸出来或缩回到静止元件中的柱塞或滚珠丝杠机构(为了方便起见,我们用术语“柱塞”指每一个都是适用的、来龙去脉清楚的每一种类型驱动部件)。把两个致动器558和560安装在相反方向上,使得柱塞或滚珠丝杠基本上同轴和与柔顺轴520的轴平行,并使得在适当地供能时,柱塞或滚珠丝杠机构向朝着柔顺止动器556的方向伸出。The stationary element of the outer centering actuator 558 is attached to the outer mounting bracket 552 , while the stationary element of the inner centering actuator 560 is attached to the inner mounting bracket 554 . The driving part of each of the two centering actuators 558 and 560 is a plunger or ball screw that extends from or retracts into the stationary element once the actuator 558 or 560 is properly energized. Mechanism (for convenience, we use the term "plunger" to refer to each type of drive component where each is applicable and the ins and outs are clear). The two actuators 558 and 560 are mounted in opposite directions so that the plunger or ball screw is substantially coaxial and parallel to the axis of the compliant shaft 520, and so that when properly energized, the plunger or ball screw The mechanism protrudes toward the compliant stop 556 .

可以看出,如果使内致动器柱塞564和外致动器柱塞562之一或二者充分缩回,以便在柔顺止动器556与致动器柱塞562和564之一或二者的远端之间存在空隙,那么,就形成柔顺运动的范围。如果这个状态得到满足,那么,平板500可以由足以克服除了安装支架552和554和柔顺轴520的摩擦力之外还有滚珠滑块502a、502b、502c和502d、和线性导轨503a和503b的摩擦力的外力驱动下,沿着线性导轨503a和503b移动。可用的柔顺运动总范围等于两个致动器柱塞562和564的远端之间的距离减去柔顺止动器556的厚度。于是,在图5(c)的系统中,如果需要的话,可以借助定心致动器558和560控制柔顺运动的范围;然而,在图5(a)和5(b)的系统中,柔顺区域是固定的。It can be seen that if one or both of the inner actuator plunger 564 and the outer actuator plunger 562 are retracted sufficiently so that the compliant stop 556 and one or both of the actuator plungers 562 and 564 If there is a gap between the distal ends of the orifice, then a compliant range of motion is formed. If this condition is satisfied, then the plate 500 can be made to overcome the friction of the ball sliders 502a, 502b, 502c and 502d, and the linear guides 503a and 503b in addition to the friction of the mounting brackets 552 and 554 and the compliant shaft 520. Driven by an external force, it moves along the linear guide rails 503a and 503b. The total range of compliant motion available is equal to the distance between the distal ends of the two actuator plungers 562 and 564 minus the thickness of the compliant stop 556 . Thus, in the system of Figure 5(c), the extent of compliance motion can be controlled by centering actuators 558 and 560, if desired; however, in the system of Figures 5(a) and 5(b), the compliance Regions are fixed.

还可以看出,如果内、外致动器柱塞564和562两者分别伸出,使得两者同时靠在柔顺止动器556上,那么,平板500固定在相对于柔顺轴520的某一位置上。然后,线性致动器508可以用于相对于平板504移动和定位平板500。It can also be seen that if both the inner and outer actuator plungers 564 and 562 are respectively extended so that both abut against the compliant stop 556 at the same time, then the plate 500 is fixed at a certain orientation relative to the compliant axis 520. position. Linear actuators 508 may then be used to move and position tablet 500 relative to tablet 504 .

一般说来,与滚珠滑块502a、502b、502c、和502d、和线性导轨503a和503b相关的摩擦大于分别在柔顺轴520与内、外安装支架554和552之间的摩擦。于是,如果定心致动器柱塞562或564之一或二者充分缩回,使得柔顺运动成为可能,然后向线性致动器电机520供能,那么,柔顺轴520和柔顺止动器556分别作相对于内、外安装支架554和552的运动。如果向致动器电机510供能,使致动器轴514从静止元件506伸出,那么,柔顺止动器526沿着外致动器柱塞562的方向运动。如果致动器电机510未关闭,那么,随着到达柔顺范围的末端,柔顺止动器556靠在外致动器柱塞562上。然后,致动器轴514的进一步伸出使平板500相对于平板504向外方向移动。相反,如果向致动器电机510供能,使致动器轴514缩回到静止元件506中,那么,柔顺止动器556沿着内致动器柱塞564的方向运动。如果致动器电机510未关闭,那么,随着到达柔顺范围的末端,柔顺止动器556靠在内致动器柱塞564上。然后,致动器轴514的进一步缩回使平板500相对于平板504移动。In general, the friction associated with ball sliders 502a, 502b, 502c, and 502d, and linear guides 503a and 503b is greater than the friction between compliant shaft 520 and inner and outer mounting brackets 554 and 552, respectively. Thus, if one or both of centering actuator plungers 562 or 564 is retracted sufficiently to enable compliant motion and then power linear actuator motor 520, then the compliant shaft 520 and compliant stop 556 Movement is made relative to the inner and outer mounting brackets 554 and 552, respectively. If the actuator motor 510 is powered such that the actuator shaft 514 extends from the stationary element 506 , the compliant stop 526 moves in the direction of the outer actuator plunger 562 . If the actuator motor 510 is not turned off, the compliance stop 556 rests on the outer actuator plunger 562 as the end of the compliance range is reached. Further extension of the actuator shaft 514 then moves the pad 500 in an outward direction relative to the pad 504 . Conversely, if actuator motor 510 is powered to retract actuator shaft 514 into stationary element 506 , compliant stop 556 moves in the direction of inner actuator plunger 564 . If the actuator motor 510 is not turned off, the compliance stop 556 rests on the inner actuator plunger 564 as the end of the compliance range is reached. Further retraction of the actuator shaft 514 then moves the pad 500 relative to the pad 504 .

在操作过程中,最好把柔顺轴520定位和固定在它相对于平板500的运动范围内、某个预选点的小邻域内的位置上。通常,这个点是两个内、外定心致动器560和558的中点;但是,存在这个点位于更靠近两个定心致动器560和558的某一个的位置上更优选的应用。我们将再次把这个邻域称为“柔顺中性区域”。柔顺中性区域通常是整个柔顺范围的一小部分;例如,40到50mm总柔顺范围当中的±3或4mm。During operation, compliance axis 520 is preferably positioned and fixed at a position within a small neighborhood of a preselected point within its range of motion relative to panel 500 . Usually, this point is the midpoint of the two inner and outer centering actuators 560 and 558; . We will again refer to this neighborhood as the "compliant neutral region". The compliance neutral region is usually a small fraction of the overall compliance range; for example, ±3 or 4mm of the 40 to 50mm total compliance range.

当柔顺止动器556位于柔顺中性区域和外致动器柱塞562的远端之间时,一般称它处在“柔顺外侧区域”中。类似地,当柔顺止动器556位于柔顺中性区域和内外致动器柱塞562的远端之间时,一般称它处在“柔顺内侧区域”。When the compliant stop 556 is located between the compliant neutral region and the distal end of the outer actuator plunger 562, it is generally said to be in the "compliant outer region". Similarly, when the compliant stop 556 is located between the compliant neutral region and the distal end of the inner and outer actuator plungers 562, it is generally said to be in the "compliant inner region".

正如下面所讨论的那样,如果遵循适当的定心致动器和设计过程,无需探测平板150相对于平板504的相对位置的传感器,也可以实现图5(c)中那种类型的有用系统。但是,为了这个目的可以把位置传感器528(未示出)可选地包括进来,以实现可能更复杂的系统。位置传感器528可以是从精确编码器、电位计等到限位开关、接近传感器、测距仪等的组合范围内的许多种已知类型的任何一种。作为最起码的能力,位置传感器528应该指示机构当前处在三个范围的哪一个中:柔顺内侧、柔顺中性、还是柔顺外侧。As discussed below, a useful system of the type in FIG. 5(c) can also be implemented without sensors to detect the relative position of plate 150 relative to plate 504 if proper centering actuator and design procedures are followed. However, a position sensor 528 (not shown) may optionally be included for this purpose, enabling a potentially more complex system. Position sensor 528 may be any of a number of known types ranging from precision encoders, potentiometers, etc., to combinations of limit switches, proximity sensors, range finders, and the like. As a minimum capability, the position sensor 528 should indicate which of three ranges the mechanism is currently in: compliant inside, compliant neutral, or compliant outside.

为了实现没有位置传感器528的系统,最好使用这种类型的定心致动器558和560,该定心致动器558和560可以被控制到能够使它们的柱塞562和564沿着给定方向移动,直到到达它的整个游动范围的程度。这样的致动器558和560可以简单得像具有柱塞562和654的螺线管器件那样,一旦供能,它马上伸长到它的整个范围,而一旦断电,在弹簧的驱动下,完全缩回。包括电机和螺杆机构的致动器558和560也是可行的。如果把硬止动器包含在致动器558和560中,以防止螺杆走过头,且如果适当地防止电机在停转时出现过热,可以在足以使它到达它的游动极限的时间长度内,沿着已知方向简单驱动螺杆。另外,电机驱动螺杆致动器可以包含限位开关,以发出已经达到游动范围的端点的信号。另一种可供选择的方案可以包含步进电机,并且,通过控制电机的步数来控制位置,可能与一个或多个限位开关结合。第二个要求是设计每个致动器柱塞562和564、或螺杆的行程长度以及内、外安装支架552和554和定心致动器558和560的布局,以达到所需结果。具体的准则包括:当致动器558和560两者都处在完全伸出状态下时,使柔顺止动器556稳固地保持在所需柔顺中性位置上;和当致动器558和560两者都处在完全缩回状态下时,实现所需运动的柔顺范围。In order to implement a system without position sensor 528, it is preferable to use centering actuators 558 and 560 of this type, which can be controlled to move their plungers 562 and 564 along the given Move in a given direction until it reaches its full range of motion. Such actuators 558 and 560 could be as simple as a solenoid device with plungers 562 and 654 that, once energized, extend to their full extent, and once de-energized, under spring actuation, fully retracted. Actuators 558 and 560 comprising motors and screw mechanisms are also feasible. If hard stops are included in the actuators 558 and 560 to prevent overrunning of the screws, and if the motor is properly prevented from overheating when stalled, it can , simply drive the screw in a known direction. Additionally, the motor driven screw actuator may incorporate limit switches to signal that the end of the travel range has been reached. Another alternative could incorporate stepper motors and, by controlling the number of motor steps to control the position, possibly in combination with one or more limit switches. The second requirement is to design the stroke length of each actuator plunger 562 and 564, or screw, and the layout of the inner and outer mounting brackets 552 and 554 and centering actuators 558 and 560 to achieve the desired results. Specific criteria include: when both actuators 558 and 560 are in a fully extended state, the compliance stop 556 is firmly maintained in the desired compliance neutral position; and when the actuators 558 and 560 When both are in the fully retracted state, a supple range of motion is achieved.

现在描述没有位置传感器的图5(c)的机构的操作。首先,向定心致动器558和560供能以完全伸出它们的柱塞562和564或螺杆。这使平板500相对于柔顺轴520移动到柔顺中性位置上。注意,在这个在图5(c)的系统中实现柔顺中性位置的步骤中,平板500在柔顺轴520保持静止的同时移动;然而,在图5(a)和5(b)的系统中,平板500保持固定,而柔顺轴520移动,以实现这个目的。现在,致动器558和560处在它们的柱塞562和564或螺杆保持在完全伸出的位置中,致使平板500保持在柔顺中性位置中的状态下。对于不可向后驱动的电机驱动致动器,简单地关掉电源就可以实现。对于其它致动器,譬如,螺线管致动器,也许有必要保持施加在上面的电激励。对于如此保持在柔顺中性位置中的平板500,线性致动器508然后用于把平板500定位在相对于平板504的所需位置上。例如,所需位置可以是将对接测试头或负载(未示出)的位置。现在,关闭线性致动器电机510,并以缩回它们的柱塞562和564或螺杆以为柔顺运动形成一个区域的方式控制定心致动器558和560。现在,当驱使测试头或负载进入它的最后对接位置时,平板500可以在外力,例如,对接机构产生的力的驱动下以柔顺方式移动。根据特定的应用和/或用户偏好,当到达最后对接位置时,定心致动器558和560可以或不用于相对于平板504有效地锁定平板500。此外,还根据特定的应用和/或用户偏好,在使测试头或负载脱离的同时,可以或不通过定心致动器558和560使平板500保持在某一位置中。但是,一旦脱离,在通过线性致动器508启动平板500的运动之前,应该根据前面的过程,把柔顺轴520放置和锁定在柔顺中性位置中。The operation of the mechanism of Figure 5(c) without a position sensor is now described. First, centering actuators 558 and 560 are powered to fully extend their plungers 562 and 564 or screws. This moves the pad 500 relative to the compliance axis 520 to a compliant neutral position. Note that in this step of achieving the compliant neutral position in the system of Figure 5(c), the plate 500 moves while the compliant axis 520 remains stationary; however, in the systems of Figures 5(a) and 5(b) , the plate 500 remains stationary while the compliant axis 520 moves to achieve this. The actuators 558 and 560 are now in a state where their plungers 562 and 564 or screws remain in the fully extended position, causing the plate 500 to remain in the compliant neutral position. For motor-driven actuators that are not back-driveable, this can be accomplished by simply turning off the power. For other actuators, such as solenoid actuators, it may be necessary to maintain electrical excitation applied to them. With pad 500 thus held in the compliant neutral position, linear actuator 508 is then used to position pad 500 in a desired position relative to pad 504 . For example, the desired location may be where a test head or load (not shown) will be docked. Now, turn off the linear actuator motor 510 and control the centering actuators 558 and 560 in a manner that retracts their plungers 562 and 564 or screws to create a zone for compliant motion. Now, when the test head or load is driven into its final docked position, the plate 500 can move in a compliant manner under external forces, eg, forces generated by the docking mechanism. Depending on the particular application and/or user preference, centering actuators 558 and 560 may or may not be used to effectively lock tablet 500 relative to tablet 504 when the final docked position is reached. Furthermore, the tablet 500 may or may not be held in a position by the centering actuators 558 and 560 while the test head or load is disengaged, also depending on the particular application and/or user preference. However, once disengaged, the compliant shaft 520 should be placed and locked in the compliant neutral position according to the previous procedure before initiating motion of the pad 500 via the linear actuator 508 .

现在描述根据图5(c)的还包含了探测平板500相对于柔顺轴520的位置的位置传感器528a(未示出)的系统。在这样的系统中,使用电机操作定心致动器558和560,以便利用有效的反馈位置是最切实可行的。致动器柱塞562和564或螺杆的整个行程和致动器558和560的布置没有在如上所述没有位置传感器528a的系统中那么重要。把致动器558和560设置成:当它们的柱塞562和564两者都完全缩回时实现运动的适当柔顺范围;而当它们完全伸出时柱塞562和564至少到达柔顺中性位置就足够了。除了位置传感器528a用于指示柔顺止动器556何时到达柔顺中性位置之外,其操作基本上与没有位置传感器528a的系统相同。此外,如果使用编码器或电位计型位置传感器528a,在图5(c)的系统中,以及在图5(a)和图5(b)的系统中,通过适当地编程控制系统,无需改变机械结构,就可以改变柔顺中性区域的位置。A system according to Fig. 5(c) also comprising a position sensor 528a (not shown) for detecting the position of the panel 500 relative to the compliance axis 520 is now described. In such a system, it is most practical to use electric motors to operate the centering actuators 558 and 560 in order to take advantage of the effective feedback position. The overall travel of the actuator plungers 562 and 564 or screws and the placement of the actuators 558 and 560 are not as important as in a system without the position sensor 528a as described above. Actuators 558 and 560 are arranged to: when both of their plungers 562 and 564 are fully retracted, achieve a suitable compliant range of motion; and when they are fully extended, plungers 562 and 564 reach at least a compliant neutral position Will suffice. Operation is essentially the same as the system without the position sensor 528a, except that the position sensor 528a is used to indicate when the compliant stop 556 has reached the compliant neutral position. Furthermore, if an encoder or potentiometer type position sensor 528a is used, in the system of Fig. 5(c), as well as in the systems of Fig. 5(a) and Fig. 5(b), by suitably programming the control system, no change The mechanical structure can change the position of the soft and neutral area.

图5(a)(以及图5(b)和图5(c))的机构也可以应用于枢转轴,其中,运动是主体或负载绕轴的旋转,而不是沿着轴平动。该技术也可以应用于转动和平动的组合。图7示出了应用于绕垂直轴102旋转的主体100的柔顺机构。这与测试头操纵器中的偏转运动相同。图7中的柔顺机构还显示了可替代图5(a)中的机构的实施例。具体地说,图5(a)中的机构具有附在臂(柔顺轴520)上的致动器轴514或螺杆和附在臂(柔顺轴520)上操作的锁定器118上的可移动主体(平板500)。在图7中,锁定器118和臂(力杆112)的布置倒过来了;也就是说,致动器轴514或螺杆514与在力杆112上操作的锁定器118耦合,力杆112又与可移动主体100耦合。可以看出图7的操作完全与图5(a)的操作类似。下面更详细地讨论包含在图7中的特征。The mechanism of Figure 5(a) (and Figures 5(b) and 5(c)) can also be applied to pivot axes, where the motion is rotation of the body or load about the axis, rather than translation along the axis. This technique can also be applied to a combination of rotation and translation. FIG. 7 shows the compliance mechanism applied to a body 100 rotating about a vertical axis 102 . This is the same as the deflection motion in the test head manipulator. The compliant mechanism in Figure 7 also shows an alternative embodiment to the mechanism in Figure 5(a). Specifically, the mechanism in Figure 5(a) has an actuator shaft 514 or screw attached to an arm (compliant axis 520) and a movable body attached to a lock 118 operating on the arm (compliant axis 520). (Tablet 500). In Figure 7, the arrangement of the locker 118 and the arm (rod 112) is reversed; Coupled with the movable body 100. It can be seen that the operation in Fig. 7 is completely similar to that in Fig. 5(a). The features included in Figure 7 are discussed in more detail below.

图5(a)到5(c)的实施例已经阐述了说明对水平面内的运动轴的柔顺性或不存在任何显著的不平衡力的其它情况的示范性实施例。图6(a)和图8(a)说明提供抵消不平衡力的平衡力、和在不平衡力可以是显著的、随位置而改变的、和往往不可预测的的驱动轴中的柔顺性的机构。这些机构被称为“平衡柔顺致动器组件(BCAA)”。The embodiment of Figures 5(a) to 5(c) has set forth an exemplary embodiment illustrating compliance to the axis of motion in the horizontal plane or otherwise in the absence of any significant unbalanced forces. Figures 6(a) and 8(a) illustrate the ability to provide balanced forces that counteract unbalanced forces, and compliance in drive shafts where unbalanced forces can be significant, vary with position, and often unpredictable. mechanism. These mechanisms are known as "Balanced Compliant Actuator Assemblies (BCAAs)".

在图6(a)和8(a)中,主体100代表可绕枢转轴102旋转的重负载(即,测试头),枢转轴102处在靠近一个表面且偏离所述主体重心相当距离的地方。图6(a)和8(a)中的主体600代表支承枢转轴102的固定结构的一部分。例如,主体100可以代表测试头,其俯仰轴或翻滚轴靠近dut接口,而主体600可以代表测试头固定支架的一部分,测试头固定支架又被与测试头操纵器(未示出)的主臂相连接的设备支承。在如下的讨论中,除非另有说明,假设俯仰轴102处在水平面内。注意,如果主体100发生旋转,使得它的重心不正好在俯仰轴102的下面,那么,由主体100的重量引起的力矩造成随主体100的位置而改变的不平衡。因此,柔顺力包括克服这个力矩以及摩擦和诸如绳索力之类的其它可能作用所需的力。In Figures 6(a) and 8(a), the body 100 represents a heavy load (i.e., a test head) that is rotatable about a pivot axis 102 located near a surface at a considerable distance from the body's center of gravity . The main body 600 in FIGS. 6( a ) and 8 ( a ) represents a portion of a fixed structure supporting the pivot shaft 102 . For example, body 100 may represent a test head with a pitch or roll axis near the dut interface, while body 600 may represent a portion of a test head mount that is in turn attached to the main arm of a test head manipulator (not shown). Connected equipment supports. In the following discussion, it is assumed that the pitch axis 102 is in the horizontal plane unless otherwise stated. Note that if the body 100 is rotated such that its center of gravity is not directly below the pitch axis 102, then the moment caused by the weight of the body 100 causes an imbalance that varies with the position of the body 100. Thus, the compliance force includes the force required to overcome this moment as well as friction and other possible effects such as rope forces.

如图6(a)和8(a)所示的和将要描述的机构包括在名称为“用于测试头操纵器的测试头平衡系统(A Test Head Balancing System for a Test HeadManipulator)、授予Ny等人和转让给与本申请相同的受让人的美国临时专利申请第60/234,598号中说明的概念。明确地说,在临时申请第60/234,598号中解释了图1(a)、1(c)、2(a)、3(a)、4(a)和4(b)。The mechanism shown in Figures 6(a) and 8(a) and to be described is included in the title "A Test Head Balancing System for a Test Head Manipulator (A Test Head Balancing System for a Test Head Manipulator), awarded to Ny et al. people and assigned to the same assignee as the present application, the U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/234,598 illustrates the concept. Specifically, in the Provisional Application No. 60/234,598, Fig. 1(a), 1( c), 2(a), 3(a), 4(a) and 4(b).

尽管没有示出,但是,在图6(a)和8(a)中暗示着,存在系统控制器。系统控制器执行控制序列,并把控制信号提供给致动器和阀门,后面将对这些加以描述。另外,系统控制器接收操作者的输入和来自传感器的反馈信号,后面也将对这些加以描述。Although not shown, it is implied in Figures 6(a) and 8(a) that a system controller is present. The system controller executes the control sequences and provides control signals to the actuators and valves, as will be described later. In addition, the system controller receives operator input and feedback signals from sensors, which are also described below.

总之,图6(a)和8(a)两者都包括绕着枢转轴102驱动主体100的线性致动器508、包括锁定器118、力杆112、和两个柔顺止动器522和524以使主体100作柔顺运动的柔顺机构、测量施加在力杆112中的不平衡力的力传感器120、和生成平衡力以补偿不平衡力的双作用气压缸128。In summary, both Figures 6(a) and 8(a) include a linear actuator 508 that drives the body 100 about the pivot axis 102, including the lock 118, the lever 112, and two compliant stops 522 and 524. A compliant mechanism for compliant motion of the main body 100, a force sensor 120 for measuring unbalanced forces applied in the force bar 112, and a double acting pneumatic cylinder 128 for generating a balanced force to compensate for the unbalanced forces.

图6(a)和8(a)是相当相似的。它们之间的唯一区别在于,如何支承双作用气压缸128的主体的。于是,下面一起描述这两个图的共同特征;并且,在适当的时候分别描述它们之间的差异。Figures 6(a) and 8(a) are quite similar. The only difference between them is how the body of the double-acting pneumatic cylinder 128 is supported. Therefore, the common features of these two figures are described together below; and the differences between them are described separately when appropriate.

在图6(a)和8(a)两者中,线性致动器508的静止元件506,包括它的电机510在内,借助于轴承620附在主体600上。线性致动器508的驱动部件是致动器螺杆514,当向电机510供能时,致动器螺杆514从静止元件506伸出或缩回到静止元件506中;明确地说,如果向电机510供能,使电机沿着第一旋转方向转动,螺杆(致动器)从静止元件506中伸出;而如果向电机510供能,使电机沿着相反方向转动,螺杆(致动器)缩回到静止元件506中。致动器螺杆514通常是滚珠螺杆;但是,在适当的地方,可以使用其它类型的螺杆或其它致动器装置。In both FIGS. 6( a ) and 8 ( a ), the stationary element 506 of the linear actuator 508 , including its motor 510 , is attached to the main body 600 by means of bearings 620 . The driving part of the linear actuator 508 is the actuator screw 514, which extends from or retracts into the stationary element 506 when power is applied to the motor 510; 510 energizes the motor to rotate in a first direction of rotation and the screw (actuator) protrudes from the stationary element 506; and if power is supplied to the motor 510 to rotate the motor in the opposite direction, the screw (actuator) Retracts into stationary element 506 . Actuator screw 514 is typically a ball screw; however, other types of screws or other actuator devices may be used where appropriate.

力杆112借助轴承116a附在主体100上。如图所示,力杆112通过锁定器118接合,锁定器118则借助于机器螺杆或其它适当的装置刚性地附在致动器螺杆514的远端。锁定器118可以是现有技术中众所周知的几种类型的任何一种。取决于所选锁定器的类型,可以通过电信号、气体输入、或适合于特定应用的其它措施控制它。当锁定器118致动时,它牢固地抓住力杆112,然后,使力杆112以刚性的方式有效地附在致动器螺杆514上。因此,当使锁定器接合时,限制主体100相对于致动器螺杆514运动。当释放锁定器118时,力杆112可以沿着锁定器118滑动,并沿着基本上与致动器螺杆514的轴平行的直线运动。因此,当瞬间把气压缸128和任何不平衡力置之度外时,通过致动锁定器118,线性致动器508可以用于使主体100围绕枢转轴102相对于主体600旋转。另外,当没有锁住锁定器118时,主体100对足够的外力作出反应,相对于致动器螺杆514和主体600自由运动;因此,实现了主体100相对于主体500的柔顺运动。也就是说,随着锁定器118被释放,响应外力,实现主体100绕着它的枢转轴102并相对于主体600的柔顺运动。为了限制柔顺运动的范围,伸出的柔顺止动器522和缩回的柔顺止动器524刚性地附在力杆112上。伸出的柔顺止动器522位于锁定器118和主体100之间。缩回的柔顺止动器524位于锁定器118的对面和锁定器118与力杆112的远端之间。The force rod 112 is attached to the main body 100 by means of a bearing 116a. As shown, the force rod 112 is engaged by a lock 118 which is rigidly attached to the distal end of the actuator screw 514 by means of a machine screw or other suitable means. The lock 118 may be any of several types well known in the art. Depending on the type of interlock selected, it may be controlled by electrical signal, gas input, or other means appropriate to the particular application. When the lock 118 is actuated, it firmly grasps the force rod 112 and then effectively attaches the force rod 112 to the actuator screw 514 in a rigid manner. Accordingly, movement of the body 100 relative to the actuator screw 514 is restricted when the locker is engaged. When the lock 118 is released, the force rod 112 can slide along the lock 118 and move along a line substantially parallel to the axis of the actuator screw 514 . Thus, the linear actuator 508 can be used to rotate the main body 100 about the pivot axis 102 relative to the main body 600 by actuating the lock 118 while momentarily setting aside the pneumatic cylinder 128 and any unbalanced forces. Additionally, when the lock 118 is not locked, the body 100 responds to sufficient external force to move freely relative to the actuator screw 514 and the body 600; thus, compliant movement of the body 100 relative to the body 500 is achieved. That is, as the lock 118 is released, compliant movement of the body 100 about its pivot axis 102 and relative to the body 600 is achieved in response to an external force. To limit the range of compliance motion, an extended compliance stop 522 and a retracted compliance stop 524 are rigidly attached to the force rod 112 . A protruding compliant stop 522 is located between the lock 118 and the main body 100 . The retracted compliant stop 524 is located opposite the lock 118 and between the lock 118 and the distal end of the force rod 112 .

双向力传感器120以沿着力杆112测量力的方式与力杆112耦合。力传感器120可以用双向测压元件、一种容易获得的器件实现。测压元件包含可以以众所周知的方式处在桥式电路之中、提供随测量力单调变化的电压输出的应变仪。利用模拟-数字转换器和处理器,可以确定沿着力杆112的力是否大于自由运动所能容忍的最大值;并且,如果是的话,确定力的方向。可选地,模拟比较器电路可以以已知的方式用于产生指示显著不平衡力的存在和方向的是/否信号。Bi-directional force sensor 120 is coupled to force bar 112 in such a way as to measure force along force bar 112 . Force sensor 120 may be implemented with a bi-directional load cell, a readily available device. The load cell comprises strain gauges which may be placed in a bridge circuit in a well known manner, providing a voltage output which varies monotonically with the measured force. Using an analog-to-digital converter and a processor, it can be determined whether the force along the force bar 112 is greater than the maximum tolerable for free motion; and, if so, the direction of the force. Alternatively, an analog comparator circuit may be used in known manner to generate a yes/no signal indicative of the presence and direction of a significant unbalanced force.

前述柔顺止动器522和524用于在线性致动器508伸出一定长度的情况下,限制力杆112相对于主体600的游动。如果杆锁定器118没有接合,力杆112可以在作用于主体100的外力的驱动下,在通过两个柔顺止动器522和524之间的距离“C”减去杆锁定器118的宽度“L”限定的游动范围上移动,并且,这也限定了主体100的运动柔顺范围。也就是说,随着杆锁定器118被松开(且优选关闭线性致动器电机510),主体100可以在足以克服柔顺力的外力的驱动下,绕着枢转轴102转过由力杆112经过距离C-L的相应运动所确定的角度。在图6(a)或8(a)中,随着锁定器118相对于力杆112运动,气压缸128中的活塞130也将移动。活塞130的总有效冲程设计成使活塞130和气压缸128不与柔顺止动器522和524干涉是重要的。The aforementioned compliant stops 522 and 524 are used to limit the movement of the force rod 112 relative to the main body 600 when the linear actuator 508 is extended to a certain length. If the rod lock 118 is not engaged, the force rod 112 can be driven by an external force acting on the body 100 to pass the distance "C" between the two compliant stops 522 and 524 minus the width of the rod lock 118 "". L" defines the range of play, and this also defines the range of motion compliance of the main body 100. That is, with the lever lock 118 released (and preferably turning off the linear actuator motor 510), the main body 100 can be driven by the force lever 112 about the pivot axis 102 under the drive of an external force sufficient to overcome the compliance force. The angle determined by the corresponding movement over the distance C-L. In Figure 6(a) or 8(a), as the lock 118 moves relative to the force rod 112, the piston 130 in the pneumatic cylinder 128 will also move. It is important that the total effective stroke of piston 130 be designed such that piston 130 and pneumatic cylinder 128 do not interfere with compliant stops 522 and 524 .

可以看出,倘若锁定器118被解开并使主体100转动一个角度,以便它的重心不正好在枢转轴102的下面,那么,两个柔顺止动器522和524必有一个将靠在锁定器118上。这是主体100的重量引起的绕枢转轴102的力矩是否足以克服系统中的静摩擦、由于气压缸128和活塞130作用在主体100上的力、和作用在系统上的任何力的情况。在这种状态下,很显然,向致动器电机510供能将使主体100绕枢转轴102旋转。这未必是最佳的操作模式;相反,它是当对本发明的示范性实施例考虑各种操作序列时应留意的情况。It can be seen that if the lock 118 is disengaged and the main body 100 is turned at an angle so that its center of gravity is not just below the pivot axis 102, then one of the two compliant stops 522 and 524 will rest against the lock. device 118. It is a matter of whether the moment about the pivot axis 102 caused by the weight of the body 100 is sufficient to overcome the static friction in the system, the forces acting on the body 100 due to the pneumatic cylinder 128 and piston 130, and any forces acting on the system. In this state, it will be apparent that energizing the actuator motor 510 will cause the main body 100 to rotate about the pivot axis 102 . This is not necessarily the best mode of operation; rather, it is something to be aware of when considering various sequences of operations for exemplary embodiments of the present invention.

在操作过程中,最好把锁定器118移动和锁定在它相对于力杆112的运动范围内、某个预选点的小邻域内的位置上。通常,这个点是两个柔顺止动器522和524的中点;但是,存在使这个点位于更靠近两个柔顺止动器522或524的某一个的位置上更优选的应用。我们将把这个邻域称为“柔顺中性区域”。柔顺中性区域通常是整个柔顺范围的一小部分;例如,40到50mm总柔顺范围当中的±3或4mm。During operation, the lock 118 is preferably moved and locked into position within a small neighborhood of a preselected point within its range of motion relative to the lever 112 . Typically, this point is the midpoint of the two compliant stops 522 and 524; however, there are applications where it is more preferable to have this point located closer to either of the two compliant stops 522 or 524. We will refer to this neighborhood as the "compliant neutral region". The compliance neutral region is usually a small fraction of the overall compliance range; for example, ±3 or 4mm of the 40 to 50mm total compliance range.

仍然参照图6(a)和8(a),当锁定器118位于柔顺中性区域和伸出的柔顺止动器522之间时,一般称它处在“柔顺伸出区域”中。类似地,当锁定器118位于柔顺中性区域和缩回的柔顺止动器524之间时,一般称它处在“柔顺缩回区域”中。Still referring to Figures 6(a) and 8(a), when the lock 118 is located between the compliant neutral region and the extended compliant stop 522, it is generally said to be in the "compliant extension region". Similarly, when the lock 118 is located between the compliant neutral region and the retracted compliant stop 524, it is generally said to be in a "compliant retracted region".

也许有必要使主体100处在平衡状态,以便使锁定器解开,然后,移动到柔顺中性位置。这种平衡可以以许多可能方式,包括,例如,使重心位于枢转轴102的下面和/或施加外力来实现。但是,正如上面所说明的,气压缸128和活塞130的目的是提供平衡力的可控制源。It may be necessary to balance the body 100 in order to disengage the lock and then move to the compliant neutral position. This balancing can be achieved in many possible ways including, for example, having the center of gravity below the pivot axis 102 and/or applying an external force. However, as explained above, the purpose of the pneumatic cylinder 128 and piston 130 is to provide a controllable source of balanced force.

配备位置传感器612以探测力杆112相对于锁定器118的位置。位置传感器612可以是从精确编码器、电位计等到限位开关、接近传感器、测距仪等的组合范围内的许多种已知类型的任何一种。作为最起码的能力,位置传感器612应该指示机构当前处在三个范围的哪一个中:柔顺伸出、柔顺中性、还是柔顺缩回。A position sensor 612 is provided to detect the position of the force bar 112 relative to the lock 118 . Position sensor 612 may be any of a number of known types ranging from precision encoders, potentiometers, etc., to combinations of limit switches, proximity sensors, range finders, and the like. As a minimum capability, the position sensor 612 should indicate which of three ranges the mechanism is currently in: compliant extension, compliant neutral, or compliant retract.

配备双作用气压缸128以产生抗衡任何不平衡力的力。其目的是使作用在主体100上的净力和/或力矩最小化到可接受水平,以便使主体100相对于主体600作柔顺运动。当实现这个目的时,可以认为主体100处在“平衡状态”下。注意,当处在平衡状态下,可能存在成为总柔顺力的分量的“残余非平衡力”。在图6(a)中,双作用气压缸128借助于适当的安装硬件624和轴承622附在主体600上。在图8(a)中,双作用气压缸128利用支架附在锁定器118上。在图6(a)和8(a)中,气压缸128包含与连杆114耦合的活塞130,连杆114与缸128的轴同轴。连杆114穿过气压缸128的端部,伸向主体100,并且,它通过轴承116b与主体100耦合。尽管图6(a)和8(a)示出借助于两个分离轴承116a和116b附在主体100上的连杆114和力杆112,但是,如在其它方面与图8(a)相同的图8(b)所示,其它可替代的结构也是可以的,包括使用支架等,以便借助于轴承116a和116b将杆114和112两者与主体100共同耦合在一起。图8(b)示出了与支架800耦合在一起的锁定器118和缸128,支架800有效地耦合杆114和112。A double-acting pneumatic cylinder 128 is provided to generate force against any unbalanced forces. Its purpose is to minimize the net forces and/or moments acting on the body 100 to acceptable levels in order to allow compliant movement of the body 100 relative to the body 600 . When this is achieved, the body 100 may be considered to be in a "state of equilibrium". Note that when in equilibrium, there may be "residual imbalance forces" that become components of the total compliance force. In FIG. 6( a ), double acting pneumatic cylinder 128 is attached to main body 600 by means of suitable mounting hardware 624 and bearings 622 . In FIG. 8( a ), a double-acting pneumatic cylinder 128 is attached to the locker 118 using a bracket. In FIGS. 6( a ) and 8 ( a ), the pneumatic cylinder 128 includes a piston 130 coupled to a connecting rod 114 that is coaxial with the axis of the cylinder 128 . The connecting rod 114 extends toward the main body 100 through the end of the pneumatic cylinder 128, and it is coupled with the main body 100 through the bearing 116b. Although Figures 6(a) and 8(a) show the connecting rod 114 and force bar 112 attached to the main body 100 by means of two separate bearings 116a and 116b, as otherwise identical to Figure 8(a) As shown in Figure 8(b), other alternative configurations are possible including the use of brackets or the like to co-couple both rods 114 and 112 with the body 100 by means of bearings 116a and 116b. FIG. 8( b ) shows locker 118 and cylinder 128 coupled together with bracket 800 , which effectively couples rods 114 and 112 .

高压气体供应器602提供用于操作气压缸128的气源。通常,在半导体测试设施中,每英寸80到100磅的气压是适合的和可获得的。气压缸128含有两个气体进口132和134,一个在活塞130的一侧,通常靠近缸128的每端。第一气体进口132借助于导管与第一蓄能器608a耦合,且第二气体进口134借助于导管与第二蓄能器608b耦合。第一和第二蓄能器608a和608b借助于导管分别与第一和第二阀门604a和604b耦合,而第一和第二阀门604a和604b借助于适当的导管与气体供应器602耦合。第一和第二阀门604a和604b由未示出的控制器来控制。A high pressure gas supply 602 provides a gas source for operating the pneumatic cylinder 128 . Typically, an air pressure of 80 to 100 pounds per inch is suitable and achievable in a semiconductor test facility. The pneumatic cylinder 128 contains two gas inlets 132 and 134 , one on either side of the piston 130 , generally near each end of the cylinder 128 . The first gas inlet 132 is coupled to the first accumulator 608a by means of a conduit, and the second gas inlet 134 is coupled to the second accumulator 608b by means of a conduit. The first and second accumulators 608a and 608b are coupled to the first and second valves 604a and 604b, respectively, by means of conduits, while the first and second valves 604a and 604b are coupled to the gas supply 602 by means of appropriate conduits. The first and second valves 604a and 604b are controlled by a controller not shown.

另外,两个阀门604a和604b每个都具有使气体排出缸128和蓄能器608a和608b的通气口。阀门604a和604b的每一个可以处在如下三个位置之一:In addition, the two valves 604a and 604b each have a vent to vent gas out of the cylinder 128 and accumulators 608a and 608b. Each of valves 604a and 604b can be in one of three positions:

“注入位置”使气体从气体供应器602流入蓄能器608a和608b和缸128。The "injection position" allows gas to flow from gas supply 602 into accumulators 608a and 608b and cylinder 128 .

“通气位置”使气体通过通气口从蓄能器608a和608b和缸128排出到大气中。The "vent position" vents gas from accumulators 608a and 608b and cylinder 128 to atmosphere through the vent ports.

“关闭位置”阻止气体通过阀门604a和604b流入或流出蓄能器608a和608b和缸128。The "closed position" prevents gas from flowing into or out of accumulators 608a and 608b and cylinder 128 through valves 604a and 604b.

阀门(604a和604b)的许多不同结构都可在市场上买到。例如,除了如图所示的单个独立阀门(604a和604b)之外,还可以存在如下单元,该单元包含两个阀,其配置成如果一个阀门处在注入位置,另一个处在排出位置,那么,当从活塞130的一侧注入气体时,从对侧自动排出气体。Many different configurations of valves (604a and 604b) are commercially available. For example, instead of a single separate valve (604a and 604b) as shown, there could be a unit containing two valves configured such that if one valve is in the fill position and the other is in the discharge position, Then, when gas is injected from one side of the piston 130, gas is automatically discharged from the opposite side.

正如上面所指出的,气压缸128的目的是生成补偿作用在负载上不平衡力的力,在本例中,负载是主体100。例如,假设主体100绕枢轴旋转一个角度,使得它重心在水平方向与枢转轴102偏离。那么,主体100的重量是形成沿着把重心移动到直好在枢转轴102下面的点的方向起作用的、绕枢转轴102的转矩的不平衡力。这个转矩的大小和方向是重量,以及旋转角的大小和方向的函数,其中,旋转角是重心相对于枢转轴102的水平位移除以从重心到枢转轴102的最短距离所得比率的反正弦。不平衡力被看出是一个变量,并且是负载位置的函数。气压缸128根据活塞130两侧上气压差,生成作用在它的活塞130上的力。这个力沿着连杆114传递,作用在由连续杆11的轴的延长线确定的位置和方向上的主体100上。设备被布置成使这根力线在整个关注的旋转角的范围内不与枢转轴102相交。因此,活塞130可以产生主体100上绕枢转轴102的转矩,这个转矩等于主体100的重量引起的不平衡转矩,方向与主体100的重量引起的不平衡转矩的方向相反,从而,使主体100达到平衡状态。由气动设备生成的力在这里被称为“平衡力”。As noted above, the purpose of the pneumatic cylinder 128 is to generate a force that compensates for unbalanced forces acting on a load, which in this example is the body 100 . For example, assume that the main body 100 is pivoted at an angle such that its center of gravity deviates from the pivot axis 102 in the horizontal direction. The weight of the body 100 is then an unbalanced force that creates a torque about the pivot axis 102 acting in a direction that moves the center of gravity to a point directly below the pivot axis 102 . The magnitude and direction of this torque is a function of the weight, and the magnitude and direction of the angle of rotation, where the angle of rotation is the inverse of the ratio of the center of gravity relative to the horizontal position of the pivot axis 102 for the shortest distance from the center of gravity to the pivot axis 102 string. The unbalanced force is seen to be a variable and a function of the load position. The pneumatic cylinder 128 generates a force on its piston 130 based on the difference in air pressure on either side of the piston 130 . This force is transmitted along the link 114 acting on the body 100 at a position and orientation determined by the extension of the axis of the continuous rod 11 . The device is arranged such that this line of force does not intersect the pivot axis 102 throughout the range of rotation angles of interest. Therefore, the piston 130 can generate a torque on the main body 100 about the pivot axis 102, which torque is equal to the unbalance torque caused by the weight of the main body 100, and the direction is opposite to the unbalance torque caused by the weight of the main body 100, thereby, Bring the main body 100 to a state of equilibrium. The forces generated by pneumatic devices are referred to herein as "balanced forces".

在操作过程中,阀门604a和604b通常处在关闭位置。为了增大作用在活塞130的一侧上的压力,把相应阀门(604a或604b)切换到注入位置。获得的压力改变是缸128中的当前压力、气体供应器的压力、和阀门(604a或604b)工作的时间长度的函数。为了减小作用在活塞130的给定侧上的压力,把相应阀门(604a或604b)切换到排出位置。这里,取得的压力改变只是缸128中的当前压力和阀门(604a或604b)工作的时间长度的函数。因此阀门(604a或604b)工作的最短时间长度决定在给定初始缸压下可以实现的缸128中的最小压力增量。通常,最短时间是8到10微秒。可以作用在连杆114上的最小平衡力增量由压力的最小增量与活塞130的面积乘积决定。通过适当选择部件和参数,可以实现小于2磅的平衡力增量,并且,这决定如何可以尽可能接近地抵消不平衡力。During operation, valves 604a and 604b are normally in a closed position. In order to increase the pressure acting on one side of the piston 130, the corresponding valve (604a or 604b) is switched to the injection position. The pressure change obtained is a function of the current pressure in the cylinder 128, the pressure of the gas supply, and the length of time the valve (604a or 604b) is operating. To reduce the pressure acting on a given side of the piston 130, the corresponding valve (604a or 604b) is switched to the exhaust position. Here, the pressure change achieved is simply a function of the current pressure in the cylinder 128 and the length of time the valve (604a or 604b) is operating. Thus the minimum length of time that the valve (604a or 604b) operates determines the minimum pressure increase in the cylinder 128 that can be achieved for a given initial cylinder pressure. Typically, the minimum time is 8 to 10 microseconds. The minimum counterbalance force increment that can act on the connecting rod 114 is determined by the product of the minimum increment of pressure and the area of the piston 130 . With proper selection of components and parameters, balance force increments of less than 2 lbs can be achieved, and this determines how as close as possible the unbalanced forces can be canceled out.

如果平衡力是通过气压缸128和活塞130,且主体100相对于主体600处在特定位置上而建立起来的,且如果主体100现在相对于主体600稍微移动,那么,活塞130在缸128内移动,而建立起来的抗衡力将随着活塞130每一侧上的气体体积改变而改变。明确地说,与机构弹簧类似,压力差随着活塞130的位移单调增大。施加在活塞130给定侧上的气动力与体积成反比地改变。但是,对于气体体积改变相对小的位移,等效弹性力随位移,以及等效“弹簧常数”K近似线性地改变。也就是说,F=Kx,其中,F是力的改变,和x是活塞130位移的改变。最好,设法使K小一点,以便力在整个运动范围上不会相当大地改变。K部分地由气体总体积相对于每活塞130位移增量引起的压力改变决定,也就是说,由V和dP/dx决定,此处,V是体积,而P是压力。随着活塞130接近它行程的一端,V变得很小,dP/dx变成成指数增大,因此,K像F那样增大。可以把如上所述的蓄能器加进来,用于显著增加V,并把dV/dx和dP/dx限制在可接受的值上。这样就在柔顺范围内提供了相对低的和不变的值K,或者说,达到了所谓的“软弹簧”效果,这显然是所需要的。If a counterbalancing force is established by the pneumatic cylinder 128 and piston 130 with the body 100 in a particular position relative to the body 600, and if the body 100 is now moved slightly relative to the body 600, the piston 130 moves within the cylinder 128 , and the counteracting force that builds up will vary as the volume of gas on each side of the piston 130 changes. Specifically, the pressure differential increases monotonically with displacement of the piston 130, similar to the mechanism spring. The aerodynamic force exerted on a given side of the piston 130 varies inversely with volume. However, for displacements where the volume change of the gas is relatively small, the equivalent elastic force varies approximately linearly with displacement, as well as the equivalent "spring constant" K. That is, F=Kx, where F is the change in force and x is the change in piston 130 displacement. Preferably, try to keep K small so that the force does not vary considerably over the range of motion. K is determined in part by the change in pressure of the total volume of gas relative to each incremental displacement of the piston 130, that is, by V and dP/dx, where V is volume and P is pressure. As the piston 130 approaches one end of its stroke, V becomes small and dP/dx becomes exponentially larger, so K increases like F. An accumulator as described above can be added to significantly increase V and limit dV/dx and dP/dx to acceptable values. This provides a relatively low and constant value of K in the compliance range, or the so-called "soft spring" effect, which is clearly desired.

在简要描述了如图6(a)和8(a)所示的设备的各部件之后,现在进一步阐述系统的细节和操作。Having briefly described the components of the apparatus shown in Figures 6(a) and 8(a), the details and operation of the system are now further explained.

为了实现平衡状态,首先锁住锁定器118,以防止主体100移动。然后,控制器对源自力传感器120的信号作出响应,以适当的方式操作阀门604a和604b,以便使平衡力施加到主体100上。控制器调整平衡力,直到它具有足够的大小和方向,以把力杆112中的力的大小减小到小于预定阈值的大小为止,预定阈值代表最小许可不平衡力。取决于环境,这个阈值通常小于5到10磅;并且,如果考虑系统的设计,它可以低至1到2磅。当这个状态已经得到满足时,主体100被认为处在“平衡状态”,并且,原始不平衡力与活塞130生成的平衡力之间的差值将被称为“残余不平衡力”。To achieve a balanced state, the locker 118 is first locked to prevent the main body 100 from moving. The controller then operates the valves 604a and 604b in an appropriate manner in response to the signal from the force sensor 120 so that a counterbalancing force is applied to the body 100 . The controller adjusts the balance force until it has sufficient magnitude and direction to reduce the magnitude of the force in the force rod 112 to a magnitude less than a predetermined threshold, which represents the minimum allowable unbalanced force. Depending on the environment, this threshold is usually less than 5 to 10 pounds; and, if the design of the system is considered, it can be as low as 1 to 2 pounds. When this condition has been satisfied, the body 100 is said to be in a "balanced state" and the difference between the original unbalanced force and the balanced force generated by the piston 130 will be referred to as the "residual unbalanced force".

现在假设主体100处在这样的平衡状态下,且锁定器118锁定和定位在远离两个柔顺止动器522和524之一的地方。如果现在解开锁定器118,那么,倘若任何残余不平衡力小于系统中的静摩擦力,包括与气压缸128和活塞130相关的挣脱力的效果,主体100和锁定器118就不移动。如果达到这个状态,那么,主体100被认为是“完全平衡”的。但是,如果残余不平衡力足以克服所有静摩擦力,那么,主体100被认为是“近乎平衡”的。如果主体100是近乎平衡的且锁定器118被释放,锁定器110将朝着两个柔顺止动器522或524之一移动。锁定器118是否靠在柔顺止动器(522或524)上取决于不平衡力和平衡力两者作为位置改变的函数如何改变。应该明白,实现完全平衡状态要求更大的精度,于是,要求更高的系统成本,然后,实现近乎平衡状态。Assume now that the body 100 is in such a balanced state with the lock 118 locked and positioned away from one of the two compliant stops 522 and 524 . If the lock 118 is now released, the main body 100 and lock 118 will not move provided any residual unbalanced forces are less than the static friction in the system, including the effect of breakaway forces associated with the pneumatic cylinder 128 and piston 130 . If this state is achieved, then the subject 100 is considered "perfectly balanced." However, if the residual imbalance force is sufficient to overcome all static friction forces, then the body 100 is considered "nearly balanced". If the body 100 is nearly balanced and the lock 118 is released, the lock 110 will move towards one of the two compliant stops 522 or 524 . Whether the lock 118 rests against the compliant stop (522 or 524) depends on how both the unbalanced and balanced forces change as a function of the change in position. It should be understood that achieving a fully balanced state requires greater accuracy, and thus, higher system cost, then, to achieve a near balanced state.

现在引入术语“柔顺准备状态”来表示主体100处在平衡状态且力杆112处在柔顺中性区域时的情况。一般说来,最好平衡状态是完全平衡状态,以便如果锁定器被解开,那么,主体100不移动。The term "compliance ready state" is now introduced to indicate the situation when the main body 100 is in equilibrium and the lever 112 is in the compliant neutral region. Generally speaking, the best equilibrium state is a perfect equilibrium state, so that if the lock is disengaged, the main body 100 does not move.

在一般情况下,可以假设主体100开始不处在平衡状态,而处在相对于主体600的任意位置上。还假设要达到柔顺准备状态。在这种情况下,不平衡力通过力杆112和力传感器120支承和测量。如果锁定器118处在解开状态和如果不平衡力相当大,那么,力杆112最有可能处在它柔顺范围的这一端或那一端;并且,不平衡力将通过靠在柔顺止动器(122或124)上的锁定器118从力杆112传递到致动器螺杆514。但是,如果锁定器118处在锁定状态,那么,不平衡力直接从力杆112传递到锁定器118,因而传递到致动器螺杆514。In general, it can be assumed that the main body 100 is not in a balanced state initially, but is at any position relative to the main body 600 . It is also assumed that a state of compliance readiness is to be achieved. In this case, the unbalanced force is supported and measured by force rod 112 and force sensor 120 . If the lock 118 is in the disengaged state and if the unbalanced force is substantial, then the lever 112 is most likely at this or that end of its compliant range; Locker 118 on (122 or 124) communicates from force rod 112 to actuator screw 514. However, if the lock 118 is in the locked state, then the unbalanced force is transferred directly from the force rod 112 to the lock 118 and thus to the actuator screw 514 .

存在几种实现所需柔顺准备状态的可能方式。但是,在任何控制动作之前,应该注意,保证主体100和其它设备不要靠在可能干涉即将到来的平衡和柔顺范围定位操作的任何外来物体或结构上。在一些情况下,也许有必要把主体100首先移入某个所需位置中。在这样的情况下,如果锁定器118还没有致动,那么,首先致动锁定器118,然后,利用线性致动器508产生所需运动。如果存在的话,其它操纵器轴的移动或许也是必要的。所述移动可以通过手动措施来实现,手动措施可以包括利用按钮命令使控制器操纵线性致动器508。可选地,控制器可以配有适当的算法,使它能够在自动定位序列中利用与位置反馈结合在一起的线性致动器508。对于处在所需位置中的主体100,存在几种达到柔顺准备状态的可能性。具体方法的设计和选择取决于现有应用的细节。如下所述的是两种所选方法,以及表示每一种的可能应用的注释。在这两种情况中,假设锁定器118不处在柔顺中性位置上。There are several possible ways of achieving the desired compliant readiness. However, before any control action, care should be taken to ensure that the main body 100 and other equipment are not resting on any foreign objects or structures that may interfere with the upcoming balancing and compliant range positioning operations. In some cases, it may be necessary to first move the main body 100 into some desired position. In such a case, if the lock 118 is not already actuated, the lock 118 is first actuated and then the linear actuator 508 is used to generate the desired movement. Movement of other manipulator axes, if present, may also be necessary. The movement may be accomplished by manual means, which may include commanding the controller to manipulate the linear actuator 508 using button commands. Optionally, the controller may be equipped with appropriate algorithms enabling it to utilize the linear actuator 508 in combination with position feedback in an automated positioning sequence. With the main body 100 in the desired position, there are several possibilities for reaching a compliant readiness. The design and choice of a specific method will depend on the details of the existing application. Described below are the two selected methods, along with notes indicating the possible application of each. In both cases, it is assumed that the lock 118 is not in the compliant neutral position.

方法1:如图15(b)中的流程图所示,这种方法需要把系统设计成平衡果总导致完全平衡状态,它包括如下一系列步骤:Method 1: As shown in the flowchart in Figure 15(b), this method needs to design the system so that the balance result always leads to a completely balanced state, which includes the following series of steps:

1.如步骤1510所示,如果锁定器118还没有被锁住,那么,锁住它。1. As shown in step 1510, if the locker 118 is not already locked, then lock it.

2.如步骤1511所示,根据前述过程,使主体100达到平衡。2. As shown in step 1511, the main body 100 is brought into equilibrium according to the aforementioned process.

3.如步骤1512所示,解开锁定器118。3. As shown in step 1512, the lock 118 is unlocked.

4.如步骤1513所示,线性致动器508用于把锁定器118定位在柔顺中性位置上。4. As shown in step 1513, the linear actuator 508 is used to position the lock 118 in the compliant neutral position.

5.如步骤1514所示,再次锁住锁定器118。5. As shown in step 1514, lock the locker 118 again.

6.如步骤1515所示,再次使主体100达到平衡,以调节步骤1513导致的不平衡的任何改变。6. As shown in step 1515 , bring the body 100 into balance again to adjust for any changes in imbalance caused by step 1513 .

7.如步骤1516所示,主体100现在完全平衡且处在柔顺准备状态,同时锁定器118锁住。7. As shown in step 1516, the main body 100 is now fully balanced and in a compliant ready state with the lock 118 locked.

注意,步骤1513要求满足两个条件才能实现。首先,要求在步骤1513中实现的平衡是完全平衡状态,以便当锁定器118被释放时,主体100保持固定不动。其次,要求锁定器118和力杆112之间的摩擦力小于系统的其余部分的静摩擦力,包括气压缸128中活塞130的挣脱力在内。Note that step 1513 needs to meet two conditions to be realized. First, it is required that the equilibrium achieved in step 1513 be a state of perfect equilibrium so that when the lock 118 is released, the main body 100 remains stationary. Second, the friction between the locker 118 and the force rod 112 is required to be less than the static friction of the rest of the system, including the breakaway force of the piston 130 in the pneumatic cylinder 128 .

方法2:如图15(c)中的流程图所示,这种方法不需要把系统设计成平衡总是导致完全平衡状态。它可以在平衡是完全平衡或近乎平衡的情况下工作。它包括如下一系列步骤:Approach 2: As shown in the flowchart in Figure 15(c), this approach does not require designing the system such that equilibrium always leads to a perfectly balanced state. It can work when the balance is perfectly balanced or nearly balanced. It includes the following series of steps:

如步骤1520所示,解开锁定器118。As shown in step 1520, the latch 118 is unlocked.

如步骤1521所示,根据来自位置传感器612的反馈,控制器操作阀门604a和604b,以操纵双作用气压缸128中的气体压力,使活塞130沿着相对于锁定器118移动力杆112所需的方向移动。这导致力杆112沿着所需方向作相对于锁定器118的移动。As shown in step 1521, based on feedback from position sensor 612, controller operates valves 604a and 604b to manipulate the gas pressure in double-acting pneumatic cylinder 128 to move piston 130 along the direction required to move force rod 112 relative to lock 118. direction to move. This causes the force bar 112 to move relative to the lock 118 in the desired direction.

如步骤1522所示,当到达柔顺中性位置时,中止步骤1521中的移动。锁定器118可以用作制动器来中止移动。As shown in step 1522, when the compliant neutral position is reached, the movement in step 1521 is aborted. The lock 118 may act as a brake to stop movement.

如步骤1523所示,锁住锁定器118。As shown in step 1523, the locker 118 is locked.

如步骤1524所示,根据前述过程,使主体100达到平衡。As shown in step 1524, the main body 100 is brought into equilibrium according to the process previously described.

如步骤1525所示,主体100现在处在柔顺准备状态,但未必完全平衡。As shown in step 1525, the main body 100 is now in a compliant state, but not necessarily in perfect balance.

注意,在步骤1521和1522中,活塞130是最初推进器(mover)。就尤其包括活塞130的挣脱力的系统静摩擦而言,相对于锁定器118定位力杆112的控制算法可能难以实现(注意,在方法1中,线性致动器508中受控最初推进器,并且,它通常提供足够的力来克服系统静态阻力)。如果试图在应用锁定器118之前,让主体100停止在所需位置上,这尤其如此。但是,合适的锁定器118也可以用作制动器,随着主体100移动到所需柔顺中性位置上,可以应用锁定器118来迫使移动终止。Note that in steps 1521 and 1522, the piston 130 is the initial mover. The control algorithm for positioning the force rod 112 relative to the locker 118 can be difficult to implement in terms of system stiction including inter alia the breakaway force of the piston 130 (note that in method 1 the initial pusher is controlled in the linear actuator 508, and , which usually provides enough force to overcome the system static resistance). This is especially true if an attempt is made to stop the main body 100 in the desired position prior to application of the lock 118 . However, suitable locks 118 can also be used as brakes, and as the body 100 is moved to the desired compliant neutral position, the locks 118 can be applied to force the movement to stop.

在测试头操纵器系统中,两个可能动作之一很可能在达到柔顺准备位置之后。第一种可能性是测试头100准备对接。在这种情况下,可以稍微移动它,以便对接致动器和对接引导机构(在图6(a)和8(a)中未示出)首先接合。对接设备通常被设计成,在这样的位置中,精密的电触点还没有接合,没有被损坏的风险。这个小移动量通常不足以干涉柔顺准备位置。如果锁定器118被锁住,现在就可以释放它了。如果存在足以引起移动的微小残余不平衡力,移动只导致对接设备的相配合的引导部件之间形成的接触。主体110现在能够柔顺地移动,且对接致动器现在可以接合,把测试头100拖入完全对接位置中。In a test head manipulator system, one of two possible actions is likely after reaching the compliant ready position. A first possibility is that the test head 100 is ready for docking. In this case, it can be moved slightly so that the docking actuator and docking guide mechanism (not shown in Figures 6(a) and 8(a)) engage first. Docking devices are typically designed in such a position that the delicate electrical contacts are not yet engaged and there is no risk of damage. This small amount of movement is usually not enough to interfere with the compliant ready position. If the latch 118 is locked, it can now be released. Movement only results in contact being made between cooperating guide parts of the docking device if there is a slight residual unbalanced force sufficient to cause movement. The main body 110 is now able to move compliantly, and the docking actuators can now engage, drawing the test head 100 into the fully docked position.

第二种可能性是借助于操纵器设备(在图6(a)和8(a)中未示出)把测试头100从当前位置移动到新位置。在这种情况下,锁定器118最好被锁住,以保持柔顺中性位置,且线性致动器508可以按需要用于把主体100移动到所需的第二位置。应注意,随着主体100作如此的移动,作用在它上面的不平衡力将很有可能发生改变。于是,当主体100到达所述第二位置时,应该再次使它达到平衡。一旦达到平衡,由于主体100仍然被锁在柔顺中性位置中,因此,它处在柔顺准备状态。如果需要,可以释放锁定器118,并且,主体100可以绕枢转轴102柔顺地移动。A second possibility is to move the test head 100 from its current position to a new position by means of a manipulator device (not shown in Figures 6(a) and 8(a)). In this case, the latch 118 is preferably locked to maintain the compliant neutral position, and the linear actuator 508 can be used as needed to move the body 100 to the desired second position. It should be noted that as the body 100 is thus moved, the unbalanced forces acting on it will likely change. Then, when the main body 100 reaches said second position, it should be brought into equilibrium again. Once balanced, the main body 100 is in a compliance-ready state since it is still locked in the compliance-neutral position. If desired, the lock 118 can be released and the main body 100 can move compliantly about the pivot axis 102 .

理想的情况是,达到柔顺准备状态的过程只进行一次,在对系统进行包括例如主体100相对于主体600的位置某种改变之前,不要重复。但是,气压缸系统易发生气体泄漏和相应的压力损失,因此,在需要的时候,应该周期性地重复实现平衡或柔顺准备状态所需的过程。在示范性的实施例中,在需要重复所需过程之前,系统保持足够的气体长达约10分钟以上。在典型的操作中,每隔几分钟(比方说,5到8分钟)循环自动重复。由气体泄漏和气体压力差损失引发的另一种考虑是,当长时间对接测试头时,平衡力将会丧失。例如,当测试持续许多小时或许多分钟时,就会发生这种情况。在对接的时候,通过对接机构牢固地保持测试头,通过前述方法不能重新建立平衡力。因此,对于脱离,必须首先锁住锁定器118,以便相对于致动器螺杆514牢固地保持主体100。然后,由对接致动机构驱动的脱离运动应该是这样的,不需要主体600和100之间的相对运动。作为可替代的方法,系统可以配有可选压力传感器(600a、606b),并且,随着对接开始,就可以记录缸128的压力。然后,正好在脱离之前,可以恢复缸128的压力,这样就可以恢复适当的平衡力。这将使锁定器118松开,并使主体100在脱离的同时作柔顺移动。Ideally, the process of reaching a compliant readiness state is done only once and not repeated until some change is made to the system including, for example, the position of body 100 relative to body 600 . However, pneumatic cylinder systems are prone to gas leaks and corresponding pressure loss, so the process required to achieve equilibrium or compliance readiness should be repeated periodically when required. In an exemplary embodiment, the system maintains sufficient gas for up to about 10 minutes or more before the desired process needs to be repeated. In typical operation, the cycle repeats automatically every few minutes (say, 5 to 8 minutes). Another consideration caused by gas leaks and loss of gas differential pressure is that when the test head is docked for an extended period of time, the balance force will be lost. This can happen, for example, when tests last many hours or many minutes. When docked, the test head is held securely by the docking mechanism, and the balancing forces cannot be re-established by the aforementioned methods. Therefore, for disengagement, the locker 118 must first be locked in order to securely hold the body 100 relative to the actuator screw 514 . Then, the disengagement movement driven by the docking actuation mechanism should be such that no relative movement between the bodies 600 and 100 is required. As an alternative, the system can be equipped with optional pressure sensors (600a, 606b) and, as docking begins, the pressure of the cylinder 128 can be recorded. Then, just before disengagement, cylinder 128 pressure can be restored so that proper balance can be restored. This releases the lock 118 and allows the body 100 to move compliantly while disengaging.

到此为止,已经对枢转轴102处在水平平面内作了讨论,这足以说明本发明的原理。但是,枢转轴102可能处在其它方向也是可以的。考虑的具体结构是垂直枢转轴的情况,其中主体100代表操纵器圆柱的支承结构,操纵器圆柱又支承着测试头。在这种情况下,枢转轴102对应于操纵器的偏转轴。由于测试头绳索弯曲生成的力,在这样的轴中可能存在不平衡力。与前面所述的由于重力引起的不平衡力相比,在这种情况中不存在重力,绳索引起的不平衡力将以一般说来不可预测的方式变化着。尽管如此,很显然,图6(a)或图8(a)的机构仍然可以用于有效地提供具有绳索力的柔顺性和抗衡性的驱动偏转轴。例如,图6(b)示出了应用于枢转轴的图6(a)所示的类型的BCAA,在此情况下,枢转轴是垂直的,即,偏转轴。还可以看出,如果绳索力很小,可忽略不计,那么,可以有效地使用不含图6(a)所示的双作用气压缸128和相关设备的机构的简化形式。因此,图7示出了对不需要任何反力的偏转轴102的应用。图7与图6(a)的不同之处在于,移去了力传感器120和气压缸128的反力设备。图7与图5(a)的柔顺机构类似,除了在图7中,致动器杆514直接与锁定器118耦合,而不是与诸如杆520之类的杆耦合。So far, the pivot axis 102 has been discussed in the horizontal plane, which is sufficient to illustrate the principles of the present invention. However, it is also possible that the pivot axis 102 may be in other orientations. The specific structure considered is the case of a vertical pivot axis, where the body 100 represents the support structure for the manipulator cylinder, which in turn supports the test head. In this case, the pivot axis 102 corresponds to the deflection axis of the manipulator. Unbalanced forces may exist in such shafts due to the forces generated by the bending of the test head cord. In contrast to the aforementioned unbalanced forces due to gravity, in the absence of gravity in this case, the unbalanced forces induced by the ropes will vary in a generally unpredictable manner. Nonetheless, it is clear that the mechanism of Figure 6(a) or Figure 8(a) can still be used effectively to provide a drive deflection axis that is compliant and counterbalanced by the force of the cable. For example, Figure 6(b) shows a BCAA of the type shown in Figure 6(a) applied to a pivot axis, in this case the pivot axis being vertical, ie the deflection axis. It can also be seen that if the rope forces are negligibly small, then a simplified version of the mechanism which does not include the double acting pneumatic cylinder 128 and associated equipment shown in Figure 6(a) can be effectively used. Fig. 7 thus shows the application of a deflection axis 102 which does not require any counter force. The difference between Fig. 7 and Fig. 6(a) is that the force sensor 120 and the counter force device of the pneumatic cylinder 128 are removed. FIG. 7 is similar to the compliance mechanism of FIG. 5( a ), except that in FIG. 7 the actuator rod 514 is coupled directly to the lock 118 rather than to a rod such as rod 520 .

如上所述,图6(a)和8(a)的BCAA相当相似。从这两种结构中选择哪一种来使用通常基于用途的物理布置的细节。例如,图8(a)将适于轴102,并由此线性致动器508中的运动的所需范围比柔顺运动的所需范围大得多的情况。这是因为,在图8(a)中,缸128内活塞130的冲程只需足以适应柔顺运动;然而,图6(a)中活塞130的冲程必须适应轴102中运动的整个范围。因此,在图8(a)中可以使用较小的和较便宜的气压缸128和活塞130组件。图6(a)是优选的例子是存在空间限制的情况,这种空间限制将阻止把BCAA的所有部件紧密地放在一起。尤其是,在图6(a)中,气压缸128和活塞130子组件可以位于远离包括致动器508、锁定器118、力杆112、和相关部件和传感器的子部件的地方。As mentioned above, the BCAAs of Figures 6(a) and 8(a) are quite similar. Which of these two structures to use is usually based on the details of the physical arrangement of the purpose. For example, Figure 8(a) would be suitable for situations where the desired range of motion in the shaft 102, and thus the linear actuator 508, is much greater than that of compliant motion. This is because, in FIG. 8( a ), the stroke of piston 130 within cylinder 128 need only be sufficient to accommodate compliant motion; Thus, a smaller and less expensive pneumatic cylinder 128 and piston 130 assembly can be used in Figure 8(a). Figure 6(a) is the preferred example where there are space constraints that would prevent all the components of the BCAA from being placed close together. In particular, in Figure 6(a), the pneumatic cylinder 128 and piston 130 subassembly may be located remotely from the subassembly including the actuator 508, lock 118, force rod 112, and associated components and sensors.

图9(a)示出了用在典型操纵器系统应用中的、两个如图8(a)所示的平衡柔顺致动器组件(BCAA)机构的典型应用的例子。在图9(a)中,一个机构影响测试头100的横摆轴934,而第二机构影响同一测试头100的俯仰轴936。还配备了为了简单起见没有示出的单个控制系统,实现对两个BCAA以及整个操纵器系统的所需控制。Figure 9(a) shows an example of a typical application of two Balanced Compliant Actuator Assembly (BCAA) mechanisms as shown in Figure 8(a) used in a typical manipulator system application. In FIG. 9( a ), one mechanism affects the yaw axis 934 of the test head 100 while a second mechanism affects the pitch axis 936 of the same test head 100 . A single control system, not shown for simplicity, is also provided to achieve the desired control of the two BCAAs as well as the entire manipulator system.

在图9(a)中示出了测试头100,其在顶面901上具有测试接口。DUT板900提供了将测试之中的器件与位于测试头100内部的测试头引脚电子线路(未示出)适当对接所需的接口电路和连接设备。In FIG. 9( a ) a test head 100 is shown having a test interface on the top surface 901 . The DUT board 900 provides the interface circuitry and connection equipment needed to properly interface the device under test with the test head pin electronics (not shown) located inside the test head 100 .

还以剖开方式示出了包括四个对接凸轮910当中的三个、四个导销912数中的三个、绳索915、绳索驱动器917、和对接控制器914的一部分的对接组件916。总之,为了将测试头100与测试设备,譬如,器件处理器(未示出)、晶片检测器等对接,首先操纵测试头100,以便导销912部分插入附在测试设备上的配合的对接组件(未示出)上的配合导孔(未示出)中。这里,对接凸轮910接合配合的对接组件(未示出)上的配合的凸轮跟随器(未示出)。现在,可以施加外力,使对接把柄914旋转,从而使绳索驱动器917旋转。随着绳索驱动器917旋转,通过绳索915传递它的运动,使对接凸轮910同步旋转,这样就把测试头100拖入它的最终对接位置中。在对接处理器914、绳索驱动器910和对接凸轮910把测试头100拖入其位置中的同时,希望测试头100在所有六个自由度中都能够柔顺地移动。在后面要讨论的图12(a)到12(d)中将更详细地示出这种对接。此外,这种对接是特此引用以供参考的、使用两个导销912和凸轮910的、授予Smith的美国专利第4,489815号所述的对接件的改进。还有,这种类型的其它对接件使用了三个导销912和凸轮910。进一步的信息请参阅inTEST手册。Docking assembly 916 including three of four docking cams 910 , three of four guide pins 912 , rope 915 , rope driver 917 , and a portion of docking controller 914 are also shown in cutaway. In general, to interface test head 100 with test equipment, such as a device handler (not shown), wafer inspector, etc., test head 100 is first manipulated so that guide pins 912 are partially inserted into mating docking assemblies attached to the test equipment. (not shown) in the mating guide hole (not shown). Here, the docking cam 910 engages a mating cam follower (not shown) on a mating docking assembly (not shown). Now, an external force can be applied to rotate the docking handle 914, thereby rotating the cord driver 917. As the cable drive 917 rotates, its motion is transmitted through the cable 915, causing the docking cam 910 to rotate synchronously, thus pulling the test head 100 into its final docking position. While docking handler 914, cable drive 910, and docking cam 910 are pulling test head 100 into position, it is desirable for test head 100 to move compliantly in all six degrees of freedom. This docking is shown in more detail in Figures 12(a) to 12(d) to be discussed later. Furthermore, this docking is a modification of the docking described in US Patent No. 4,489,815 to Smith, which is hereby incorporated by reference, using two guide pins 912 and cams 910 . Also, other docking members of this type use three guide pins 912 and cams 910 . See the inTEST manual for further information.

测试头100被安装在如,例如,授予Holt的美国专利第5,030,869和5,450,766号和inTEST手册所述的测试头操纵器(未示出)的典型绳索枢轴环924上。图9(a)示出了附在绳索枢轴环924上的测试头固定件926,而测试头支承梁922的第一端附在所述测试头固定件926上。测试头支承梁922的轴与绳索枢轴环924的平面正交,且轴的延长线穿过绳索枢轴环924的中心。测试头支承梁922延伸过测试头100后部上的小孔920,刚性地附在圆形轴承组件905的外环904上。内环902被安排在内部,并且由圆形轴承组件905的外环904支承。内、外环902和904分别是圆形、共面、和同心的。横摆轴934与两个环902和904的平面垂直,并且穿过它们的共同中心。内环902在外环904的内部绕横摆轴934旋转。两根附属轴906穿过外环904中的缝隙,将内环904与轴承块908耦合,轴承块908固定在测试头100的两侧,其被示为在与测试头支承梁922平行的垂直平面上。轴承块908使测试头100能够绕着由附属轴906定义的枢转轴936旋转。The test head 100 is mounted on a typical cable pivot ring 924 of a test head manipulator (not shown) as described, for example, in US Patent Nos. 5,030,869 and 5,450,766 to Holt and the inTEST manual. FIG. 9( a ) shows a test head mount 926 attached to a rope pivot ring 924 to which a first end of a test head support beam 922 is attached. The axis of the test head support beam 922 is normal to the plane of the cable pivot ring 924 and the extension of the axis passes through the center of the cable pivot ring 924 . Test head support beam 922 extends through aperture 920 on the rear of test head 100 and is rigidly attached to outer ring 904 of circular bearing assembly 905 . An inner ring 902 is arranged inside and is supported by an outer ring 904 of a circular bearing assembly 905 . Inner and outer rings 902 and 904 are circular, coplanar, and concentric, respectively. Roll axis 934 is perpendicular to the plane of the two rings 902 and 904 and passes through their common center. The inner ring 902 rotates about the yaw axis 934 inside the outer ring 904 . Two accessory shafts 906 pass through gaps in the outer ring 904, coupling the inner ring 904 with bearing blocks 908, which are secured on either side of the test head 100, which are shown at perpendicular angles parallel to the test head support beam 922. on flat surface. Bearing block 908 enables test head 100 to rotate about pivot axis 936 defined by accessory shaft 906 .

六个凸轮跟随器(未示出)用作支承器件,承受作低摩擦横摆运动的同时内环902施加在外环904上的负载。凸轮跟随器(未示出)当中的三个处在外环904的内圆周线附近相隔120°的地方,承受与横摆轴934垂直的方向上的径向负载。其它三个凸轮跟随器(未示出)以支承与横摆轴934平行的轴向负载的方式在前面三个之间等间隔地也排列在外环904的内部。Six cam followers (not shown) are used as support means to take up the load exerted by the inner ring 902 on the outer ring 904 while performing a low friction yaw motion. Three of the cam followers (not shown) are located 120° apart near the inner circumference of the outer ring 904 and bear radial loads in a direction perpendicular to the yaw axis 934 . The other three cam followers (not shown) are also arranged inside the outer ring 904 at equal intervals between the first three in a manner to support an axial load parallel to the yaw axis 934 .

总而言之,绳索枢轴环924支承测试头固定件926。测试头固定件926支承着限定横滚轴的测试头支承梁922。测试头支承梁922支承着外环904,而外环904又支承内环902。内环902提供横摆轴934并支承附属轴906。附属轴906支承测试头100并提供俯仰轴936。这种布置使测试头100能够绕俯仰轴936(被显示成水平的)转动±5°和绕横摆轴934(被显示成垂直的)转动±5°,其中,横摆轴和俯仰轴相互垂直和彼此与测试头支承梁922垂直。俯仰轴和横摆轴的范围由内置在为了简单起见在图9(a)中未示出的系统中的物理约束和机构止动器分别限制在±5°内。另外,位置传感器(未示出)可以以已知的方式包括进来,以指示测试头100相对于俯仰轴936和横摆轴934的相对位置,和把这个信息提供给控制系统。Overall, the tether pivot ring 924 supports the test head mount 926 . A test head mount 926 supports a test head support beam 922 that defines a roll axis. Test head support beam 922 supports outer ring 904 which in turn supports inner ring 902 . Inner ring 902 provides yaw axis 934 and supports accessory shaft 906 . Auxiliary shaft 906 supports test head 100 and provides pitch axis 936 . This arrangement enables test head 100 to rotate ±5° about pitch axis 936 (shown horizontal) and ±5° about roll axis 934 (shown vertical), where the yaw and pitch axes are relative to each other. Perpendicular to the test head support beams 922 and to each other. The ranges of the pitch and yaw axes are limited to within ±5°, respectively, by physical constraints and mechanical stops built into the system not shown in Figure 9(a) for simplicity. Additionally, position sensors (not shown) may be included in known manner to indicate the relative position of test head 100 with respect to pitch axis 936 and roll axis 934, and to provide this information to the control system.

绳索枢轴环924通常提供测试头100绕支承梁922定义的轴的±95°滚动。在测试接口表面朝上的图9(a)中,测试头100被显示在大约+90°的位置上。测试头绳索的部件穿过绳索枢轴环924,和测试头固定件926中的开孔928被安排成沿着测试头支承梁922方向,并且通过支持杆开孔902进入测试头100。附在支承梁922上的腹板918在它们分散到测试头内部的各种电子元件(未示出),为绳索元件提供支承并消除应变。The tether pivot loop 924 generally provides ±95° roll of the test head 100 about the axis defined by the support beam 922 . In Figure 9(a) with the test interface surface facing upwards, the test head 100 is shown at approximately +90°. Components of the test head cord are threaded through cord pivot ring 924 and opening 928 in test head mount 926 is arranged along test head support beam 922 and into test head 100 through support rod opening 902 . Webs 918 attached to support beams 922 provide support and strain relief for the tether elements as they disperse to various electronic components (not shown) inside the test head.

如果无需让所有转轴都穿过重心就能够提供平衡柔顺运动,那是有利的。在图9(a)中,具有与图8(a)所示和如前所述相同类型的两个平衡柔顺致动器组件930和932用于消除俯仰轴936和横摆轴934为作平衡柔顺运动而穿过重心的必要性。It would be advantageous to be able to provide balanced compliant motion without requiring all axes of rotation to pass through the center of gravity. In FIG. 9( a ), there are two balanced compliant actuator assemblies 930 and 932 of the same type as shown in FIG. 8( a ) and previously described to eliminate the pitch axis 936 and yaw axis 934 for balancing. The need for smooth movement through the center of gravity.

两个BCAA 930和932布置成使它们的力杆112和连杆114一般与测试头支承梁922定义的横滚轴平行。横摆BCAA 930被定向成使沿着力杆112或连杆114作用的力将产生绕着横摆轴934的非零力矩。类似地,俯仰BCAA932定向成使沿着力杆112或连杆114作用的力将产生绕着俯仰轴936的非零力矩。两个BCAA 930和932的线性致动器508的静止元件506借助于轴承620适当地附在测试头固定件926上。The two BCAAs 930 and 932 are arranged such that their force bars 112 and links 114 are generally parallel to the roll axis defined by the test head support beam 922. Yaw BCAA 930 is oriented such that a force acting along lever 112 or link 114 will generate a non-zero moment about yaw axis 934. Similarly, pitch BCAA 932 is oriented such that a force acting along force rod 112 or link 114 will produce a non-zero moment about pitch axis 936 . The stationary element 506 of the linear actuator 508 of the two BCAAs 930 and 932 is suitably attached to the test head fixture 926 by means of the bearing 620.

重要的是,两个BCAA 930和932能够彼此之间相互作用最小地进行操作。因此,最好把横摆BCAA 930定向成使它的力杆112和连杆114沿着几乎与俯仰轴936相交的直线作用。类似地,最好也把俯仰BCAA 932定向成使它的力杆112和连杆114沿着几乎与横摆轴934相交的直线作用。但是,如图9(a)所示,两根力杆112和两根连杆114分别附在测试头100上,每一根分别带有轴承116a和116b。因此,不可能让横摆BCAA 930的力杆112的延长轴和连杆114的延长轴两者与俯仰轴936相交。实际上,两根杆112和114通常靠得很近,使得与两根杆112和114平行和几乎在两根杆112和114中间的直线与俯仰轴936相交。类似地,不可能使俯仰BCAA932的力杆112的延长轴和连杆114的延长轴与横摆轴934相交。实际上,两根杆112和114通常靠得很近,使得与两根杆112和114平行和几乎在两根杆112和114中间的直线与俯仰轴936相交。在前面参照图8(a)和8(b)所说明的、BCAA的可替代结构中,力杆112和连杆114的测试头100端部可以与适当的支架800连接在一起。此外,正如前面参照图8(b)所说明的那样,可以把与测试头100耦合的支架116a和116b连接在一起,以便只有一个轴承116b需要与测试头100相连接。在这种情况下,轴承116可以处在与正在讨论的轴相交并与力杆112和连杆114两者都平行的直线上。图9(b)显示了配有这样的单个轴承116b的系统。图9(b)在其它方面与图9(a)相同。Importantly, the two BCAAs 930 and 932 are able to operate with minimal interaction with each other. Therefore, it is preferable to orient the roll BCAA 930 so that its lever 112 and link 114 act along a line that nearly intersects the pitch axis 936. Similarly, pitch BCAA 932 is also preferably oriented so that its lever 112 and link 114 act along a line that nearly intersects roll axis 934. However, as shown in FIG. 9(a), two force rods 112 and two connecting rods 114 are attached to the test head 100, each with a bearing 116a and 116b, respectively. Therefore, it is impossible to have both the extension axis of the lever 112 and the extension axis of the link 114 of the yaw BCAA 930 intersect the pitch axis 936. In practice, the two rods 112 and 114 are generally close together such that a line parallel to and almost midway between the two rods 112 and 114 intersects the pitch axis 936 . Similarly, it is not possible to intersect the extension axis of the moment bar 112 and the extension axis of the link 114 of the pitch BCAA 932 with the roll axis 934 . In practice, the two rods 112 and 114 are generally close together such that a line parallel to and almost midway between the two rods 112 and 114 intersects the pitch axis 936 . In an alternative configuration of the BCAA as previously described with reference to FIGS. 8( a ) and 8 ( b ), the test head 100 ends of the force bar 112 and link 114 may be connected together with a suitable bracket 800 . In addition, as previously described with reference to FIG. 8( b ), the brackets 116 a and 116 b coupled to the test head 100 may be connected together so that only one bearing 116 b needs to be connected to the test head 100 . In this case, bearing 116 may lie on a line that intersects the axis in question and is parallel to both force bar 112 and link 114 . Figure 9(b) shows a system with such a single bearing 116b. Fig. 9(b) is otherwise the same as Fig. 9(a).

现在可以描述图9(a)和9(b)所示的系统的操作。在一般情况下,可以假设测试头100最初处在不平衡状态和处在两个BCAA 930和932的锁定器118解开的任意位置。在最坏情况的场面中,测试头100靠在内置在系统中的物理约束和机械止动器上,也就是说,存在把测试头100保持在俯仰轴936和横摆轴934中在其运动极限的位置上的显著不平衡力,且不平衡力没有被两个BCAA 930和932的任何部件完全支承。第一个目的是把测试头100放置在相对于俯仰轴936和横摆轴934的柔顺准备状态(即,平衡状态和柔顺中性位置)中。锁住两个BCAA 930和932每一个的锁定器118。然后,致动器508用于把测试头100定位到所希望的第一位置处,该位置远离内置在系统中的物理约束和机械止动器,且此处不平衡力被两个BCAA 930和932的任一个或两个的锁定器118和线性致动器508完全支承。此外,这个所希望位置应该是这样的,使测试头100可以在它的整个柔顺范围上充分地移动,以便使柔顺准备状态在没有来自可能内置在系统中的物理约束和机械止动器的任何一个的干扰情况下得以实现。The operation of the system shown in Figures 9(a) and 9(b) can now be described. In general, it can be assumed that the test head 100 is initially in an unbalanced state and in any position where the lockers 118 of the two BCAAs 930 and 932 are disengaged. In a worst-case scenario, the test head 100 rests against physical constraints and mechanical stops built into the system, that is, there are Significant unbalanced forces at extreme locations that are not fully supported by any part of the two BCAAs 930 and 932. The first purpose is to place the test head 100 in a compliant readiness state (ie, an equilibrium state and a compliant neutral position) with respect to the pitch axis 936 and yaw axis 934 . Lock the lock 118 of each of the two BCAAs 930 and 932. Actuator 508 is then used to position test head 100 to a desired first position away from physical constraints and mechanical stops built into the system, where the unbalanced force is captured by the two BCAAs 930 and Either or both lockers 118 and linear actuators 508 of 932 are fully supported. Furthermore, this desired position should be such that the test head 100 can move sufficiently throughout its compliant range so that the compliant readiness occurs without any constraints from physical constraints and mechanical stops that may be built into the system. A disturbance situation is achieved.

把测试头100移动到所希望位置可以通过手动措施来实现,这种手动措施可以包括利用按钮指令使控制器操纵线性致动器508。可选地,控制器可以配有适当的算法,使它能够在自动定位序列中利用与位置反馈结合在一起的线性致动器508。Moving test head 100 to a desired position may be accomplished by manual means, which may include commanding the controller to manipulate linear actuator 508 using button commands. Optionally, the controller may be equipped with appropriate algorithms enabling it to utilize the linear actuator 508 in combination with position feedback in an automated positioning sequence.

对于现在所希望位置之中的测试头100,现在可以实现柔顺准备状态了。在所希望位置中,在两个BCAA 930和932之间共享不平衡力。也就是说,不平衡力被分解成两个分力,一个分力沿着横摆BCAA力杆112作用,另一个分力沿着俯仰BCAA力杆112作用。可以依次对轴进行操作。首先是一根轴,然后是另一根轴。由于使一根轴处在柔顺准备状态下可能扰乱以前在另一根轴中实现的状态,因此,可以重复地轮流对每根轴再次进行操作,直到这两根轴的平衡和位置同时得到满足为止。利用已知的方法,可以实现控制算法,使依次对每根轴进行重复操作的序列自动化,直到实现整个柔顺准备状态为止。但是,实际上,每根轴试两次通常就足够了。With the test head 100 now in the desired position, the compliance ready state can now be achieved. In the desired position, the unbalanced force is shared between the two BCAAs 930 and 932. That is to say, the unbalanced force is decomposed into two component forces, one component acts along the yaw BCAA lever 112 , and the other component acts along the pitch BCAA lever 112 . Axis operations can be performed sequentially. First one axis, then another. Since placing one axis in a compliant ready state may disturb the state previously achieved in the other axis, each axis can be repeatedly manipulated again in turn until the balance and position of both axes are satisfied at the same time until. Using known methods, it is possible to implement a control algorithm that automates the sequence of repeated operations for each axis in turn until the complete compliant readiness is achieved. However, in practice, two trials per axis are usually sufficient.

选择哪根轴首先对其进行操作取决于各种准则。在某些应用中,最好总是首先解决特定轴。在其它一些应用中,最好随机选择它。还有,在其它一些应用中,最好根据作用在各个BCAA上的力的比较结果,选择对其进行操作的第一轴。例如,最好对其上作用不平衡力的较大分量的BCAA上首先进行操作。于是,可以比较两个力传感器120的输出,然后,把不平衡力的分量最大的那根轴选为第一。类似地,你也可以选择不平衡力的分量最小的那根轴。在每一种情况下,如果不平衡力的两个分量接近相等,那么,可以随机选择这一根轴或那一根轴。Which axis to choose to operate on first depends on various criteria. In some applications it is always best to address a specific axis first. In some other applications it may be better to choose it randomly. Also, in other applications it may be desirable to select the primary axis to operate on based on a comparison of the forces acting on the individual BCAAs. For example, it is best to work first on the BCAA on which the larger component of the unbalanced force acts. Thus, the outputs of the two force sensors 120 can be compared, and then the axis with the largest unbalanced force component is selected first. Similarly, you can choose the axis with the smallest component of unbalanced force. In each case, if the two components of the unbalanced force are approximately equal, then one or the other axis can be chosen at random.

被选为首先对其进行操作的那根轴现在被称为第一轴,而另一根轴则被称为第二轴。现在按照适当的过程,譬如,前面所述的方法1(图15(b))或方法2(图15(c)),使第一轴进入柔顺准备状态中。在这样做的同时,第二轴的BCAA(930或932)的锁定器118仍然锁着。当第一轴已经实现了柔顺准备状态时,锁住它BCAA(930或932)的锁定器118;然后,也可以使第二轴进入柔顺准备状态中。在使第二轴进入柔顺准备状态的过程中,在第一轴中建立起来的平衡可能受到一点干扰。于是,可以重复使第一轴进入柔顺准备状态的过程。类似地,也可以重复使第二轴进入柔顺准备状态的过程。典型做法是,叠代两次通常同时在两根轴中实现足够合理程度的柔顺准备状态。The axis chosen to be operated on first is now called the primary axis, and the other axis is called the secondary axis. Now follow the appropriate procedure, eg, Method 1 (Fig. 15(b)) or Method 2 (Fig. 15(c)) described above, to bring the first axis into compliance preparation. While doing so, the locker 118 of the BCAA (930 or 932) of the second shaft remains locked. When the first shaft has achieved the compliance ready state, lock the locker 118 of its BCAA (930 or 932); then, the second shaft can also be brought into the compliance ready state. The balance established in the first axis may be disturbed a little in the process of bringing the second axis into compliance readiness. Thus, the process of bringing the first axis into compliance readiness can be repeated. Similarly, the process of bringing the second axis into a compliance ready state can also be repeated. Typically, two iterations usually achieve a reasonable enough degree of compliance readiness in both axes simultaneously.

我们现在可以考虑如图9(a)所示包含两个BCAA 930和932的测试头操纵器的整个操作。从处在任意位置中和没有与任何测试设备对接的测试头100开始,具有BCAA 934和936的轴将首先进入锁定器118锁住的同时柔顺准备状态。然后,在适当的时候利用BCAA线性致动器508,操纵测试头100进入对接准备位置,也就是说,在测试头100要与之对接,以便对接设备的配合部件接近接合点的测试设备附近的位置。在图9(a)所示的对接机构中,这将是导销921处在附近但还没有插入配合导孔(未示出)中的点。由于假设测试头100处在新的方向,因此,可以进一步假设它不再为平衡和柔顺准备状态。于是,具有BCAA(934和936)的轴再次进入同时柔顺准备状态。现在,解开BCAA锁定器118,调动测试头100,以便对接致动机构变成接合。在图9(a)所示的测试头100中,这出现在导销912已经插入导孔(未示出)和配合对接组合(未示出)上的凸轮跟随器已经充分插入对接凸轮910中,使对接处理器914能够进行操作的时候。现在启动对接致动机构,把测试头拖入完全对接位置。在图9(a)中,这通过旋转对接处理器914来实现。其它对接致动机构是已知的,包括电动、气动、和真空操作型在内,可以同样好地使用。在对接的同时,如有必要测试头100可以自由地作柔顺运动。测试头100可以保持对接很大的时间间隔,且气压缸128中的气压差可能因泄漏而损失。于是,为了脱离,保持锁定器118锁住,并沿着与测试接口表面(未示出)垂直的直线路径撤回测试头100,以便无需作完全柔顺运动。可选地,系统可以配有压力传感器(606a、606b),使得当正好在对接之前已经实现柔顺准备状态时,活塞130每一侧上压力可以被控制器(未示出)记录下来。然后,在脱离之前,控制利用这个信息恢复柔顺准备状态,并且,脱离不再与柔顺运动有关。一旦测试头100已经脱离,可以按需要使BCAA受控轴934和936再次进入柔顺准备状态。We can now consider the entire operation of the test head manipulator comprising two BCAAs 930 and 932 as shown in Fig. 9(a). Starting with the test head 100 in any position and not docked with any test equipment, the shaft with the BCAA's 934 and 936 will first enter the compliant ready state while the locker 118 is locked. Then, using the BCAA linear actuator 508 at the appropriate time, the test head 100 is maneuvered into the docking ready position, that is, in the vicinity of the test device with which the test head 100 is to be docked so that the mating parts of the docking device approach the joint. Location. In the docking mechanism shown in Figure 9(a), this would be the point where the guide pin 921 is nearby but not yet inserted into a mating guide hole (not shown). Since the test head 100 is assumed to be in a new orientation, it can further be assumed that it is no longer ready for balance and compliance. Then, the shafts with BCAA (934 and 936) are again put into simultaneous compliance readiness. Now, the BCAA lock 118 is disengaged and the test head 100 is mobilized so that the docking actuation mechanism becomes engaged. In the test head 100 shown in Figure 9(a), this occurs after the guide pin 912 has been inserted into the guide hole (not shown) and the cam follower on the mating mating assembly (not shown) has been fully inserted into the mating cam 910 , when enabling the docking processor 914 to operate. Now activate the docking actuator mechanism and pull the test head into the fully docked position. In FIG. 9( a ), this is accomplished by rotating the docking handler 914 . Other docking actuation mechanisms are known, including electric, pneumatic, and vacuum operated types, and may be used equally well. While docking, the test head 100 is free to make compliant movements if necessary. The test head 100 may remain docked for significant time intervals, and the differential air pressure in the pneumatic cylinder 128 may be lost to leaks. Then, to disengage, keep latch 118 locked and withdraw test head 100 along a straight path perpendicular to the test interface surface (not shown) so that full compliance is not required. Optionally, the system can be equipped with pressure sensors (606a, 606b) so that the pressure on each side of the piston 130 can be recorded by a controller (not shown) when a compliant readiness state has been achieved just prior to docking. Control then uses this information to restore compliance readiness prior to disengagement, and disengagement is no longer associated with compliance motion. Once the test head 100 has been disengaged, the BCAA controlled shafts 934 and 936 can be brought into compliance readiness again as desired.

图10a、10b、10c、10d、10e、和10f显示了本发明应用于垂直轴的许多个实施例。Figures 10a, 10b, 10c, 10d, 10e, and 10f show a number of embodiments of the invention applied to vertical axes.

图10d和10e类似。这两个都具有固定垂直柱1000,而致动器驱动垂直轴由柱1000确定。在图10d中,图8a所示那种类型的BCAA用于达到平衡和柔顺状态;然而,在图10e中,图6a所示那种类型的BCAA用于这个目的。如下的讨论与这两个图的共同点有关。在必要的地方,指出基于BCAA类型的具体差异。Figures 10d and 10e are similar. Both of these have a fixed vertical column 1000 and the actuator drives the vertical axis determined by the column 1000 . In Figure 1Od, BCAAs of the type shown in Figure 8a are used to achieve a state of balance and compliance; however, in Figure 1Oe, BCAAs of the type shown in Figure 6a are used for this purpose. The following discussion relates to what these two diagrams have in common. Where necessary, specific differences based on BCAA type are noted.

总地参照图10d和10e,主臂1030以利用轨道1058和直线引导轴承(未示出)或圆轴(未示出)和轴承(未示出)的普通方式可滑动地附在柱1000上。测试头(未示出)通过任意个众所周知的装置(也未示出)与主臂1030耦合。因此,主臂1030支承着负载。主臂1030的垂直运动受上止动器1032限制。Referring generally to Figures 10d and 10e, the main arm 1030 is slidably attached to the post 1000 in the conventional manner utilizing rails 1058 and linear guide bearings (not shown) or round shafts (not shown) and bearings (not shown) . A test head (not shown) is coupled to main arm 1030 by any number of well-known means (also not shown). Thus, the main arm 1030 supports the load. Vertical movement of the main arm 1030 is limited by an upper stop 1032 .

包括致动器电机510a的线性致动器508a的静止元件506a附在基板1003上。这个致动器508a被称为主线性致动器508a。主线性致动器508a的驱动部件514a是螺杆,通常是具有适当螺距和摩擦的滚珠螺杆或梯形螺杆,以便不可向后驱动。无论是否加电,主线性致动器508a都必须能够安全地支承整个负载。主线性致动器508a驱动主臂1030经过它的整个垂直范围,以便主线性致动器508a的行程等于操纵器的垂直行程。实际上,行程长达30英寸的适用致动器可以在市场上购买得到,并且,这种类型的操纵器可以相应地被设计成具有长达30英寸的垂直行程。对于更长的垂直行程,可以使用图10a、10b、和10c所示那些类型的可伸缩柱。A stationary element 506a comprising a linear actuator 508a of an actuator motor 510a is attached to the base plate 1003 . This actuator 508a is referred to as the main linear actuator 508a. The drive member 514a of the main linear actuator 508a is a screw, typically a ball screw or a trapezoidal screw with suitable pitch and friction so that it cannot be driven backwards. Whether powered or not, the primary linear actuator 508a must be able to safely support the entire load. The primary linear actuator 508a drives the primary arm 1030 through its entire vertical extent so that the travel of the primary linear actuator 508a is equal to the vertical travel of the manipulator. In practice, suitable actuators are commercially available with travels up to 30 inches, and manipulators of this type can accordingly be designed with vertical travels up to 30 inches. For longer vertical travels, telescoping columns of the type shown in Figures 10a, 10b, and 10c can be used.

支架1040附在主致动器螺杆514a的顶端。图6a(与图10e一样)或图8a(与图10d一样)所示那种类型的BCAA将主臂1030与支架1040耦合。BCAA包括相对于力杆112精确定位锁定器118的BCAA致动器508b。主致动器508a的操作使支架1040作垂直运动,这又使主臂1030及其负载作相应的垂直运动。主臂1030及其负载的重量通过BCAA机构传递给支架1040和致动器螺杆514a。Bracket 1040 is attached to the top end of main actuator screw 514a. A BCAA of the type shown in FIG. 6a (as in FIG. 10e ) or FIG. 8a (as in FIG. 10d ) couples the main arm 1030 to the bracket 1040 . The BCAA includes a BCAA actuator 508b that precisely positions the lock 118 relative to the force rod 112 . Operation of the main actuator 508a causes vertical movement of the carriage 1040, which in turn causes corresponding vertical movement of the main arm 1030 and its payload. The weight of the main arm 1030 and its payload is transferred to the bracket 1040 and actuator screw 514a through the BCAA mechanism.

在正常使用下,主臂1030将首先处在锁定器解开的柔顺准备状态。也就是说,锁定器118相对于力杆112位于柔顺中性位置,而气压缸128中的气体压力被调整成使连杆114和活塞130基本上承受整个负载。在这种情况下,由力传感器120测量的力几乎是零。并且,活塞130最好相对于缸128处于柔顺中性位置上,使得在活塞130不必到其冲程的末端的情况下,负载就能够在它的整个柔顺范围上移动。然后,主线性致动器508a用于在垂直方向定位负载。Under normal use, the main arm 1030 will first be in a compliant ready state with the lock disengaged. That is, the lock 118 is in a compliant neutral position relative to the force rod 112, and the gas pressure in the pneumatic cylinder 128 is adjusted such that the connecting rod 114 and piston 130 bear substantially the entire load. In this case, the force measured by force sensor 120 is almost zero. Also, the piston 130 is preferably in a compliant neutral position relative to the cylinder 128 so that the load can move through its full compliant range without the piston 130 having to reach the end of its stroke. The main linear actuator 508a is then used to position the load in the vertical direction.

在垂直轴的情况中,不平衡力的方向总是向下的。于是,不需要双作用气压缸(正如图6a和8a的一般情况所示的那样);具有单个气体进口132的单作用气压缸128就足够了。因此,如图所示,只有一个三位阀604、一个蓄能器608、和一个可选压力传感器606,它们通过柔软导管1010与高压气体供应器602耦合。柔软导管1010允许气压缸128和它的相关部分相对于通常静止的气体供应器602运动。缸128和活塞130的直径最好足以支承主臂1030和附在它上面的负载。例如,如果主臂1030和所附负载的组合重量是1000磅,且可以进入缸128的最大气体压力是100磅每平方英寸,那么,缸128和活塞130的面积最好至少10平方英寸,且相应直径至少接近3.57英寸。所需缸128的直径与负载的平方根成正比。因此,负载加倍要求缸128的直径增加2的平方根,或者,可选地,可以让气体压力加倍(例如,借助于气压倍加器)。如果对于给定负载,所需缸130的尺寸太大,那么,可以平行地排列两个或更多个较小的缸128。In the case of a vertical axis, the direction of the unbalanced force is always downwards. Thus, there is no need for a double-acting pneumatic cylinder (as shown generally in Figures 6a and 8a); a single-acting pneumatic cylinder 128 with a single gas inlet 132 is sufficient. Thus, as shown, there is only one three position valve 604 , one accumulator 608 , and one optional pressure sensor 606 , which are coupled to the high pressure gas supply 602 via flexible conduit 1010 . The flexible conduit 1010 allows the pneumatic cylinder 128 and its associated parts to move relative to the normally stationary gas supply 602 . The diameters of cylinder 128 and piston 130 are preferably sufficient to support main arm 1030 and the load attached thereto. For example, if the combined weight of the main arm 1030 and attached load is 1000 pounds, and the maximum gas pressure that can enter the cylinder 128 is 100 pounds per square inch, then the cylinder 128 and piston 130 preferably have an area of at least 10 square inches, and The corresponding diameter is at least approximately 3.57 inches. The required cylinder 128 diameter is proportional to the square root of the load. Thus, doubling the load requires increasing the diameter of the cylinder 128 by the square root of two, or, alternatively, doubling the gas pressure (eg, with the aid of a gas pressure doubler). If the required cylinder 130 size is too large for a given load, then two or more smaller cylinders 128 may be arranged in parallel.

通常,最好具有大约±1英寸的垂直柔顺运动。通常,最好让活塞130的冲程略大于由柔顺止动器522和524确定的柔顺范围,以便在锁定器118靠在柔顺止动器上的情况下,活塞不会“触底”。将系统设计成,在操作过程中,如果锁定器130相对于伸出的柔顺止动器522和缩回的柔顺止动器524处于其柔顺中性位置上,那么,活塞130相对于缸128处于柔顺中性位置上。在对接期间,负载可以在如柔顺止动器522和524限定的整个柔顺范围上移动。Generally, it is best to have a vertically compliant motion of about ±1 inch. In general, it is desirable to have the stroke of piston 130 slightly greater than the compliance range determined by compliance stops 522 and 524 so that the piston does not "bottom out" with locker 118 against the compliance stops. The system is designed such that, during operation, if the lock 130 is in its compliant neutral position relative to the extended compliant stop 522 and the retracted compliant stop 524, then the piston 130 is in the neutral position relative to the cylinder 128. Soft neutral position. During docking, the load can move over the entire compliance range as defined by compliance stops 522 and 524 .

在图10(d)中,缸128和锁定器118通过支架1052相互刚性地附在一起,而系统可以方便地布置成无论锁定器118什么时候处在柔顺中性位置上,活塞130也处在这样的位置上。例如,优选柔顺中性位置往往是定心位置;且系统可以被布置成当锁定器118被定心在柔顺止动器522和524之间时,活塞130处在它冲程的中点上。图10(d)所示的单个位置传感器1046足以把锁定器118和活塞130两者定位在它们各自柔顺中性位置上。In Figure 10(d), cylinder 128 and locker 118 are rigidly attached to each other by bracket 1052, and the system can be conveniently arranged so that whenever locker 118 is in the compliant neutral position, piston 130 is also in the neutral position. In such a position. For example, the preferred compliant neutral position tends to be the centered position; and the system can be arranged so that when the lock 118 is centered between the compliant stops 522 and 524, the piston 130 is at the midpoint of its stroke. A single position sensor 1046 shown in Figure 10(d) is sufficient to position both the lock 118 and the piston 130 in their respective compliant neutral positions.

在图10e中,锁定器118没有附在缸128上,而锁定器118可以并的确相对于缸128运动。为了实现把锁定器118和活塞130两者定位在柔顺中性位置上的所需目标,需要除了由所示位置传感器1046提供的信息之外的信息。与活塞130或BCAA致动器508b有关的位置信息足够了。在优选实施例中,系统被设计成如果BCAA致动器508b充分伸出且锁定器118处在它的柔顺中性位置上,那么,活塞也将处在柔顺中性位置上。探测BCAA致动器508b的完全伸出状态可以以公知方式轻易实现,该公知方式包括使用包含在所购BCAA致动器508b组件内的限位开关(在图中未示出),或者通过操作BCAA致动器508b足以使它到达它的游动终点和停止的时间间隔来实现。在后一种情况中,建议把限流电压供应器用于BCAA致动器电机510b,使出现过热现象的可能性达到最低程度。一种可选方法是探测活塞130相对于它的缸128的位置。气压缸-活塞组件往往由它们的制造者配备限位开关(在图中未示出),该制造者将允许这种探测。In FIG. 10e , the lock 118 is not attached to the cylinder 128 , but the lock 118 can and does move relative to the cylinder 128 . To achieve the desired goal of positioning both the locker 118 and the piston 130 in a compliant neutral position, information in addition to that provided by the illustrated position sensor 1046 is required. Positional information about the piston 130 or BCAA actuator 508b is sufficient. In the preferred embodiment, the system is designed so that if the BCAA actuator 508b is fully extended and the lock 118 is in its compliant neutral position, the piston will also be in its compliant neutral position. Detecting the fully extended state of the BCAA actuator 508b is readily accomplished in known ways, including using limit switches (not shown) included in purchased BCAA actuator 508b assemblies, or by operating The BCAA actuator 508b is sufficient for it to reach the end of its swim and the time interval between stops is achieved. In the latter case, it is recommended to use a current limited voltage supply for the BCAA actuator motor 510b to minimize the possibility of overheating. An alternative method is to detect the position of the piston 130 relative to its cylinder 128 . Pneumatic cylinder-piston assemblies are often equipped with limit switches (not shown in the figure) by their manufacturer, which will allow this detection.

在某些应用中,当活塞处在它的游动范围上的任何点上,最好使BCAA致动器508b能够在柔顺止动器522和524限定的整个柔顺范围上定位锁定器118。在这种情况中,图10e中BCAA致动器508b的范围至少是柔顺范围加上活塞130的冲程的和。此外,在图10e中,在实现柔顺准备状态的过程中,有必要直接探测活塞130的位置。相比之下,图10d中BCAA致动器508b的所需范围至少是柔顺范围或活塞130的冲程的较大者,并且,只有所示的单个位置传感器1046就足够了。In some applications, it may be desirable to have the BCAA actuator 508b able to position the lock 118 over the entire compliant range defined by the compliant stops 522 and 524 when the piston is at any point in its range of travel. In this case, the range of the BCAA actuator 508b in FIG. 10e is at least the sum of the compliance range plus the stroke of the piston 130 . Furthermore, in Fig. 10e, it is necessary to directly detect the position of the piston 130 during the process of achieving the compliance ready state. In contrast, the required range of the BCAA actuator 508b in Figure 10d is at least the greater of the compliance range or the stroke of the piston 130, and only a single position sensor 1046 as shown is sufficient.

实现柔顺准备状态的操作序列如下:The sequence of operations to achieve a compliant ready state is as follows:

首先,我们定义“平衡序列”。First, we define a "balanced sequence".

平衡序列(如图15(d)所示)Balance sequence (as shown in Figure 15(d))

1.如步骤1530所示,锁住锁定器118。1. As shown in step 1530, lock the locker 118.

2.如步骤1531所示,调整缸128中的气体压力,直到力传感器120指示由力杆112施加在锁定器118上的力小于阈值为止。2. As shown in step 1531, adjust the gas pressure in the cylinder 128 until the force sensor 120 indicates that the force exerted by the force rod 112 on the lock 118 is less than a threshold.

现在,为了实现柔顺准备状态(“柔顺准备序列1”)Now, in order to achieve the compliant ready state ("compliant ready sequence 1")

柔顺准备序列1(如图15(e)所示)(可应用于图10d和10e两者)Compliant preparation sequence 1 (shown in Figure 15(e)) (applicable to both Figures 10d and 10e)

1.如步骤1540所示,执行平衡序列。1. As shown in step 1540, a balancing sequence is performed.

2.如步骤1541所示,解开锁定器118。2. As shown in step 1541, the lock 118 is unlocked.

3.如步骤1542a所示,利用BCAA致动器508b把锁定器118定位在柔顺中性位置上。3. As shown in step 1542a, use the BCAA actuator 508b to position the lock 118 in the compliant neutral position.

4.如果系统是图10e所示那种类型的,如步骤1542b所示锁住锁定器118,然后,如步骤1542c中的可替换实施例所示,利用BCAA致动器508b把活塞130定位在它的柔顺中性位置上。4. If the system is of the type shown in Figure 10e, lock the locker 118 as shown in step 1542b, then, as shown in an alternative embodiment in step 1542c, use the BCAA actuator 508b to position the piston 130 in the Its supple neutral position.

5.如步骤1543所示,如果力传感器120指示平衡已经受到干扰或变坏(例如,如果测量的力大于力阈值),那么,重复平衡序列。5. As shown in step 1543, if the force sensor 120 indicates that the balance has been disturbed or deteriorated (eg, if the measured force is greater than the force threshold), then the balancing sequence is repeated.

6.如步骤1544所示,如果锁定器118锁住,那么,解开锁定器118。6. As shown in step 1544, if the lock 118 is locked, then unlock the lock 118.

应注意,在柔顺准备序列1中,优选地用于平衡的力阈值必须小于静摩擦力和气动活塞挣脱力的合力。否则,当在步骤1541中解开锁定器118时,锁定器118将移动,靠在柔顺止动器522或524上,且BCAA致动器508b的操作将不会使锁定器118作相对于力杆112的移动。但是,静摩擦力和气动活塞挣脱力的合力通常在5到10磅或更大一点的范围内,因此,可以在1到3磅内平衡。It should be noted that in compliance preparation sequence 1, preferably the force threshold for balancing must be less than the sum of the static friction force and the pneumatic piston breakaway force. Otherwise, when the lock 118 is released in step 1541, the lock 118 will move against the compliant stop 522 or 524, and operation of the BCAA actuator 508b will not cause the lock 118 to act against the force Movement of rod 112 . However, the combined force of static friction and air piston breakaway force is usually in the range of 5 to 10 pounds or a little more, so it can be balanced within 1 to 3 pounds.

对于如后所述的理由,优选地系统被设计成满足前述准则。但是,在实现这个准则是不可能的或不切实际的情况下,存在实现柔顺准备状态的其它可能可替换序列。现在描述两种序列。For reasons as described later, preferably the system is designed to satisfy the aforementioned criteria. However, in cases where achieving this criterion is impossible or impractical, there are other possible alternative sequences to achieve a compliant readiness state. Two sequences are now described.

第一种可替换序列是借助于如下操作序列(“柔顺准备序列2”),利用气压缸128和活塞130定位活塞118:A first alternative sequence uses the pneumatic cylinder 128 and piston 130 to position the piston 118 by means of the following sequence of operations ("Compliance Preparation Sequence 2"):

柔顺准备序列2(如图15(f)所示)(可应用于图10d和10e两者)Compliant preparation sequence 2 (shown in Figure 15(f)) (applicable to both Figures 10d and 10e)

1.如步骤1550所示,解开锁定器118。1. As shown in step 1550, the lock 118 is unlocked.

2.如步骤1551所示,从缸130中排出气体,以便伸出的柔顺止动器522靠在锁定器118上。2. As shown in step 1551 , exhaust gas from the cylinder 130 so that the extended compliant stop 522 rests on the lock 118 .

3.如步骤1552所示,调整BCAA致动器508b,以便它接近其冲程的中点或接近它所需柔顺中性位置(这个步骤要求使用众所周知的解决方案,包括使用位置传感器1046来探测致动器508b的驱动部件514b相对于它静止部件506b的位置。在一些情况中,致动器508b配有限位开关,检测驱动部件514b何时到达它游动的终点;可以以已知方式与定时器结合使用,获得所需结果)。3. As shown in step 1552, adjust the BCAA actuator 508b so that it is near the midpoint of its stroke or near its desired compliant neutral position (this step requires the use of well known solutions including the use of the position sensor 1046 to detect the actuation The position of the driving part 514b of the actuator 508b relative to its stationary part 506b. In some cases, the actuator 508b is equipped with a limit switch that detects when the driving part 514b reaches the end of its travel; to achieve the desired result).

4.如步骤1553所示,把气体注入缸128中,将缸气体压力增加到使活塞130挣脱和向上移动的点。4. As shown in step 1553, inject gas into the cylinder 128, increasing the cylinder gas pressure to the point where the piston 130 breaks free and moves upward.

5.如步骤1554所示,在借助于所示的位置传感器1046监视力杆112相对于锁定器118的位置的同时,继续调整缸128的气体压力,使活塞130,并因而连杆114和力杆112继续移动。5. As shown in step 1554, while monitoring the position of the force rod 112 relative to the lock 118 by means of the position sensor 1046 as shown, continue to adjust the gas pressure of the cylinder 128 so that the piston 130, and thus the connecting rod 114 and force Rod 112 continues to move.

6.如步骤1555a所示,当力杆112相对于锁定器118到达柔顺中性位置时,锁住锁定器118并停止调整缸128中的气体压力。6. As shown in step 1555a, when the force rod 112 reaches the compliant neutral position relative to the locker 118, lock the locker 118 and stop adjusting the gas pressure in the cylinder 128.

7.如步骤1555b中的可替换实施例所示,如果系统是图10e所示那种类型,那么,利用BCAA致动器508b把活塞130定位在它柔顺中性位置上。7. As shown in an alternative embodiment in step 1555b, if the system is of the type shown in Figure 10e, then use the BCAA actuator 508b to position the piston 130 in its compliant neutral position.

8.如步骤1556所示,执行平衡序列。8. As shown in step 1556, a balancing sequence is performed.

第二种可替换序列是稍微改变一下设计。与如上所述的避免使活塞130触底的偏爱相反,系统被布置成如果在缸128中不存在气体压力且锁定器118解脱,那么,使活塞130靠在缸128的下端。实际上,靠在缸128的底端的活塞130执行伸出柔顺止动器522的功能,并因此,可以从系统中省略掉伸出的柔顺止动器522(还应注意,如果使活塞130靠在作为止动器的缸128的顶端,那么,可以省略缩回的柔顺止动器524)。然后,可应用如下“柔顺准备序列3”。The second alternative sequence is to change the design slightly. Contrary to the preference to avoid bottoming of the piston 130 as described above, the system is arranged so that the piston 130 rests against the lower end of the cylinder 128 if there is no gas pressure in the cylinder 128 and the lock 118 is disengaged. In fact, the piston 130 resting against the bottom end of the cylinder 128 performs the function of extending the compliant stop 522, and thus, the extending compliant stop 522 can be omitted from the system (note also that if the piston 130 is placed against the At the top end of the cylinder 128 as a stop, the retracted compliant stop 524 can then be omitted). Then, the following "Compliant Prep Sequence 3" can be applied.

柔顺准备序列3(如图15(g)所示)(可应用于图10d和10e两者)Compliant preparation sequence 3 (shown in Figure 15(g)) (applicable to both Figures 10d and 10e)

1.如步骤1560所示,使致动器508a缩回到使缸128内活塞到达它冲程的底部的位置(取决于设计,这可以由合并在致动器508a内的限位开关,通过沿着缩回方向驱动致动器508a足够长时间以达到完全缩回状态,或其它已知技术来实现)。1. As shown in step 1560, retract actuator 508a to a position where the piston in cylinder 128 has reached the bottom of its stroke (depending on the design, this may be controlled by a limit switch incorporated in actuator 508a, via Actuator 508a is driven in the retracted direction long enough to achieve the fully retracted state, or other known techniques).

2.如步骤1561所示,解开锁定器118。2. As shown in step 1561, the lock 118 is unlocked.

3.如步骤1562所示,从缸128中排出气体,以便活塞130靠在缸128的底部上。3. As shown in step 1562, the gas is exhausted from the cylinder 128 so that the piston 130 rests on the bottom of the cylinder 128.

4.如步骤1563所示,利用BCAA致动器508b,把锁定器118定位在柔顺中性位置上。4. As shown in step 1563, using the BCAA actuator 508b, position the lock 118 in the compliant neutral position.

5.如步骤1564所示,执行平衡序列。5. As shown in step 1564, a balancing sequence is performed.

6.如步骤1565所示,保持锁定器118锁住,利用BCAA致动器508b以将负载提升到活塞130相对于缸128处于柔顺中性位置(通常接近中点)的位置上。6. Keeping the lock 118 locked, use the BCAA actuator 508b to lift the load to a position where the piston 130 is in a compliant neutral position relative to the cylinder 128 (typically near midpoint), as shown in step 1565.

7.如步骤1566所示,由于活塞130的移动会引起出现稍微不平衡,再次执行平衡序列。7. As shown in step 1566, due to the slight imbalance caused by the movement of the piston 130, the balancing sequence is performed again.

在柔顺准备序列2和3中,假设平衡序列阈值不小于与挣脱力合成在一起的静止摩擦力得不到保证。因此,锁定器118应该停留在锁定状态,直到实现准备对接位置且负载局部由对接设备支承,(或其它所需状态)。但是,应该看到,如果可以让锁定器118保持解脱,而借助于主致动器508a在垂直方向定位负载,那么,位置传感器1046可以用于检测负载是否遇到任何障碍物。如果遇到障碍物,那么,负载上的相关力将使力杆112相对于锁定器118运动。这种运动可以通过位置传感器1046来检测,由此提供信号,以采取适当的行动,譬如,使主致动器508a停止。于是,系统优选地设计成可以可靠地使用柔顺准备序列1。In compliance preparation sequences 2 and 3, it is not guaranteed that the equilibrium sequence threshold is not less than the static friction combined with the breakaway force. Therefore, the lock 118 should remain in the locked state until the ready-to-dock position is achieved and the load is partially supported by the docking device, (or other desired state). However, it should be appreciated that if the lock 118 can be left disengaged while the load is positioned vertically by means of the primary actuator 508a, then the position sensor 1046 can be used to detect whether the load encounters any obstructions. If an obstacle is encountered, then the associated force on the load will move the force bar 112 relative to the lock 118 . This movement may be detected by the position sensor 1046, thereby providing a signal to take appropriate action, such as stopping the main actuator 508a. The system is then preferably designed such that the compliant preparation sequence 1 can be used reliably.

图10f还可应用于固定垂直柱1000。垂直轴是致动器508驱动的。图8(a)和图10d所示那种类型的BCAA提供了垂直驱动,以及平衡和柔顺状态。在图10d和10e的描述中所述的许多内容也可应用于图10f,因此,在这一节中,我们主要集中在新的内容和相异之处上。FIG. 10f can also be applied to fixing vertical columns 1000 . The vertical axis is driven by actuator 508 . BCAAs of the type shown in Figure 8(a) and Figure 10d provide vertical actuation, as well as balanced and compliant states. Many of the things described in the description of Figures 10D and 10E are also applicable to Figure 10F, so in this section we mainly focus on what is new and what is different.

图10f中的系统含有单个线性致动器508,它等效于图8a中BCAA的线性致动器508。并且,它在行程和技术要求方面等效于图10d和10e中的主线性致动器508a。致动器螺杆514的远端附在锁定器118上。支架1094把锁定器118附在单作用气压缸128上。主臂1030由连杆114和活塞130的子组件、力杆112、力传感器120、和锁定器118的子组件、或取决于系统状态由这两个子组件的组合支承。附在线性致动器508的远端并与主臂1030耦合的设备等效于图1(a)的平衡机构。The system in Figure 1Of contains a single linear actuator 508, which is equivalent to the linear actuator 508 of the BCAA in Figure 8a. Also, it is equivalent in travel and specification to the main linear actuator 508a in Figures 1Od and 1Oe. The distal end of the actuator screw 514 is attached to the lock 118 . Bracket 1094 attaches lock 118 to single-acting pneumatic cylinder 128 . The main arm 1030 is supported by the subassembly of the connecting rod 114 and piston 130, the subassembly of the force rod 112, the force sensor 120, and the lock 118, or a combination of these two subassemblies depending on the system state. The device attached to the distal end of the linear actuator 508 and coupled to the main arm 1030 is equivalent to the balancing mechanism of FIG. 1( a ).

为了使主臂1030进入柔顺准备状态,可以使用如下序列(“柔顺准备序列4”):In order to bring the main arm 1030 into a compliant ready state, the following sequence ("compliant ready sequence 4") may be used:

柔顺准备序列4(如图15(h)所示)Compliant preparation sequence 4 (as shown in Figure 15(h))

1.如步骤1570所示,解开锁定器118。1. As shown in step 1570, the lock 118 is unlocked.

2.如步骤1571所示,从缸128中排出气体,以便伸出的柔顺止动器522靠在锁定器118上。2. Exhaust gas from cylinder 128 so that extended compliant stop 522 rests against lock 118 as shown in step 1571 .

3.如步骤1572所示,把气体注入缸128中,将缸气体压力增加到使活塞130挣脱和向上移动的点。3. As shown in step 1572, inject gas into the cylinder 128, increasing the cylinder gas pressure to the point where the piston 130 breaks free and moves upward.

4.如步骤1573所示,在监视位置传感器1046的同时,继续调整缸气体压力,使活塞130、并因而使连杆114和力杆112继续移动。4. As shown in step 1573, while monitoring the position sensor 1046, continue to adjust the cylinder gas pressure to continue to move the piston 130, and thus the connecting rod 114 and force rod 112.

5.如步骤1574所示,当力杆112到达相对于锁定器118的柔顺中性位置时,锁住锁定器118并停止调整缸128中的气体压力。5. As shown in step 1574, when the force rod 112 reaches the compliant neutral position relative to the lock 118, lock the lock 118 and stop adjusting the gas pressure in the cylinder 128.

6.如步骤1575所示,执行平衡序列。6. As shown in step 1575, a balancing sequence is performed.

如果平衡序列力阈值小于静摩擦力和活塞130的挣脱力的合力,那么,由于致动器508用于把主臂1030和它支承的负载驱动到所需垂直位置,因此可以解开锁定器118,并且让它保持在解开状态。正如前面所讨论的那样,这是优选的。否则,应该使锁定器118保持在锁住状态,直到实现负载由对接设备部分支承的对接位置准备状态(或其它适当的所需状态)为止。If the equilibrium sequence force threshold is less than the resultant of the static friction force and the breakaway force of the piston 130, then the lock 118 can be disengaged since the actuator 508 is used to drive the main arm 1030 and the load it supports to the desired vertical position, And keep it unwrapped. As discussed earlier, this is preferred. Otherwise, the lock 118 should be maintained in the locked condition until the ready docked position (or other suitable desired condition) in which the load is partially supported by the docking device is achieved.

图10a和10b两者都具有操纵器,以及与授予Holt等人的PCT申请PCT/US01/06456中描述的可伸缩柱类似的可伸缩柱1000。在图10a中,图8a所示那种类型的BCAA用于提供平衡和柔顺状态;而在图10b中,图6a所示那种类型的BCAA用于这个目的。如下的讨论与这两个图的共同点有关。在必要的地方,指出基于BCAA类型的具体差异。Both Figures 10a and 10b have a manipulator, and a telescoping column 1000 similar to that described in PCT Application PCT/US01/06456 to Holt et al. In Figure 10a, BCAAs of the type shown in Figure 8a are used to provide a state of balance and compliance; while in Figure 10b, BCAAs of the type shown in Figure 6a are used for this purpose. The following discussion relates to what these two diagrams have in common. Where necessary, specific differences based on BCAA type are indicated.

主臂1030利用线性导轨1058和直线引导轴承(未示出)可滑动地附在可伸缩柱1000的上段1001上。这提供了主臂1030相对于上段1001大约±1英寸的垂直微动。上、下主壁止动器1032和1054分别限制主臂1030相对于上段1001的游动。测试头(未示出)通过任意个众所周知的装置(也未示出)与主臂1030耦合。因此,主臂1030支承着负载。The main arm 1030 is slidably attached to the upper section 1001 of the telescoping column 1000 using linear guides 1058 and linear guide bearings (not shown). This provides about ± 1 inch of vertical inching of the main arm 1030 relative to the upper section 1001 . Upper and lower main wall stops 1032 and 1054 respectively limit the movement of main arm 1030 relative to upper section 1001 . A test head (not shown) is coupled to main arm 1030 by any number of well-known means (also not shown). Thus, the main arm 1030 supports the load.

第一线性致动器508a相对于固定的下段1004和基座1003沿着垂直方向移动柱的中段1002。第二线性致动器508b被安装在中段1002上附着的第一支架1034上,并且,它相对于固定中段1002沿着垂直方向移动上段1001。可伸缩柱100的伸缩提供了负载的第一垂直定位。在对接过程中,主臂1030在上止动器1032和下止动器1054之间的微动用于柔顺垂直移动。The first linear actuator 508a moves the middle section 1002 of the column in a vertical direction relative to the fixed lower section 1004 and the base 1003 . The second linear actuator 508b is mounted on the first bracket 1034 attached to the middle section 1002 and it moves the upper section 1001 in a vertical direction relative to the fixed middle section 1002 . Telescoping of the telescoping column 100 provides a first vertical positioning of the load. During the docking process, the slight movement of the main arm 1030 between the upper stop 1032 and the lower stop 1054 is used for compliant vertical movement.

BCAA 508c耦合在附在上段1001的第二支架1040与主臂1030之间。用在图8a中那种类型的BCAA 508c用在图10a中,而用在图6a中那种类型的BCAA 508c用在图10b中。在每一种情况中,BCAA 508c用于控制垂直微动和在垂直微动的整个范围上提供柔顺状态。The BCAA 508c is coupled between the second bracket 1040 attached to the upper section 1001 and the main arm 1030. A BCAA 508c of the type used in Figure 8a is used in Figure 10a, and a BCAA 508c of the type used in Figure 6a is used in Figure 10b. In each case, the BCAA 508c is used to control vertical inching and provide compliance over the entire range of vertical inching.

在这个系统中的柔顺准备状态类似于像图10d和10e中那样含有固定柱1000的系统的柔顺准备状态。但是,另外,还需要把主臂1030定位在上主臂止动器1032和下主臂止动器1054之间的特定的大致同心位置(或者,在下止动器1054不存在的情况下,定位到相对于上止动器1032特定距离的位置)。我们称主臂1030的那个位置为柔顺中性位置。The compliant readiness in this system is similar to that of a system containing fixed posts 1000 as in Figures 1Od and 1Oe. In addition, however, the main arm 1030 also needs to be positioned at a specific approximately concentric position between the upper main arm stop 1032 and the lower main arm stop 1054 (or, in the absence of the lower stop 1054, the positioning to a position at a specified distance relative to the upper stop 1032). We call that position of the main arm 1030 the compliant neutral position.

然后,有关柔顺准备状态的状态可以陈述如下:Then, the state about the compliant readiness can be stated as follows:

1.气压缸128中的气体压力必须是这样的,使连杆114和活塞130基本上承受主臂1030及其负载的整个负载。1. The gas pressure in the pneumatic cylinder 128 must be such that the connecting rod 114 and piston 130 bear substantially the entire load of the main arm 1030 and its load.

2.锁定器118必须相对于伸出的柔顺止动器522和缩回的柔顺止动器524处于柔顺中性位置(通常,这两者之间的中点),2. The lock 118 must be in a compliant neutral position (typically, midway between the two) with respect to the extended compliant stop 522 and the retracted compliant stop 524,

3.活塞130相对于它的缸128处于柔顺中性位置,且3. The piston 130 is in a compliant neutral position relative to its cylinder 128, and

4.主臂1030必须相对于上主臂止动器1032和下主臂止动器1054处于柔顺中性位置(通常,这两者之间的中点)。4. The main arm 1030 must be in a compliant neutral position relative to the upper main arm stop 1032 and the lower main arm stop 1054 (typically, midway between the two).

实现图10a和10b中上面列表的第2项和第3项中的锁定器118和活塞130的共同定位要求与前面参照图10d和10e所述的相同。明确地说,由于锁定器118通过支架1052附在缸128上,这可以通过图10a中的设计来实现,并且,在图10b中需要BCAA致动器508c或活塞120的位置信息。Achieving co-location of the locker 118 and piston 130 in items 2 and 3 of the upper list in Figures 10a and 10b requires the same as previously described with reference to Figures 10d and 10e. In particular, since the locker 118 is attached to the cylinder 128 by the bracket 1052, this can be achieved with the design in Figure 10a, and requires positional information of the BCAA actuator 508c or piston 120 in Figure 10b.

为了提供用锁定器118和活塞130的组合共同定位主臂1030所需的一般解决方案,在图10a和10b中示出了探测主臂1030相对于上段1001的位置的位置传感器1056。应注意,在图10b中(不是在图10a中),这个传感器1056也有效地指示活塞130相对于缸128的位置。因此,在图10a和10b两者中,与所示的位置传感器1046组合在一起的传感器1056足以为一般解决方案提供所有必要的位置感测。To provide the general solution needed to co-locate the main arm 1030 with the combination of the lock 118 and the piston 130, a position sensor 1056 detecting the position of the main arm 1030 relative to the upper section 1001 is shown in Figures 10a and 10b. It should be noted that in FIG. 10b (not in FIG. 10a ), this sensor 1056 is also effectively indicative of the position of the piston 130 relative to the cylinder 128 . Thus, in both Figures 10a and 10b, sensor 1056 combined with position sensor 1046 as shown is sufficient to provide all necessary position sensing for a general solution.

可选地,并且,考虑到整个成本,系统最好被设计成当BCAA致动器508c完全伸出时,主臂1030处在它的柔顺中性位置,且锁定器118也处在它的柔顺中性位置。对于这种约束,可以从图10a和10b中删除主臂位置传感器1056。但是,有必要包括当BCAA致动器508c完全伸出时进行检测的装置。对此的典型解决方案已参照图10d和10e作了讨论。Alternatively, and given overall cost considerations, the system is preferably designed so that when the BCAA actuator 508c is fully extended, the main arm 1030 is in its compliant neutral position and the lock 118 is also in its compliant position. neutral position. For this constraint, the master arm position sensor 1056 can be omitted from Figures 10a and 10b. However, it is necessary to include means to detect when the BCAA actuator 508c is fully extended. A typical solution to this has been discussed with reference to Figures 10d and 10e.

如下的操作序列可以用于把设备定位在柔顺准备状态下(“柔顺准备序列5”)The following sequence of operations can be used to position the device in the compliance ready state ("Compliant Ready Sequence 5")

柔顺准备序列5(如图15(i)所示)Compliant preparation sequence 5 (as shown in Figure 15(i))

1.如步骤1580所示,执行平衡序列。1. As shown in step 1580, a balancing sequence is performed.

2.如步骤1581a所示,解开锁定器118,并利用BCAA致动器508c把锁定器118定位在柔顺中性位置上。2. As shown in step 1581a, unlock the lock 118 and position the lock 118 in the compliant neutral position using the BCAA actuator 508c.

3.如步骤1581b中的可替代实施例所示,如果系统是图10b所示那种类型的,那么,锁住锁定器118,并利用BCAA致动器508c把活塞130定位在它的柔顺中性位置上。3. As shown in the alternative embodiment in step 1581b, if the system is of the type shown in FIG. sexual position.

4.如步骤1582所示,如果主臂1030还没有处在它的柔顺中性位置上(例如,通过设计),那么,锁住锁定器118,并利用BCAA致动器508c把主臂1030移动到它的柔顺中性位置上。4. As shown in step 1582, if the main arm 1030 is not already in its compliant neutral position (e.g., by design), then lock the lock 118 and move the main arm 1030 using the BCAA actuator 508c to its supple neutral position.

5.如步骤1583所示,如果力传感器120指示力杆112中的力大于力阈值,那么,执行平衡序列。5. As shown in step 1583, if the force sensor 120 indicates that the force in the force rod 112 is greater than the force threshold, then a balancing sequence is performed.

6.如步骤1584所示,如果锁住锁定器118,那么,可以解开它。6. As shown in step 1584, if the lock 118 is locked, then it can be unlocked.

应注意,步骤1581和1584要求力阈值小于静摩擦力和活塞130的挣脱力的合力。与图10d和10e的情况中一样,对于系统这是优选准则。就此情况而言,随着主臂1030和它支承的负载被驱动到所需垂直位置,可以解开锁定器118,并且使它保持在解开状态。此外,正如授予Holt等人的PCT申请PCT/US01/06456所述的那样,两个位置传感器1046和1056之一可以用于检测主臂1030相对于上段1001的运动,其指示遇到障碍物。It should be noted that steps 1581 and 1584 require the force threshold to be less than the sum of the static friction force and the breakaway force of the piston 130 . As in the case of Figures 1Od and 1Oe, this is the preferred criterion for the system. In this regard, as the main arm 1030 and the load it supports are driven to the desired vertical position, the latch 118 can be released and remain in the released state. Additionally, as described in PCT Application PCT/US01/06456 to Holt et al., one of the two position sensors 1046 and 1056 may be used to detect movement of the main arm 1030 relative to the upper section 1001, which is indicative of an obstacle being encountered.

在系统被设置成使力阈值未必小于静摩擦力和活塞130的挣脱力的合力的情况中,则可以采用柔顺准备序列2或柔顺准备序列3来取代柔顺准备序列5的前面三个步骤。下面提供所得的序列。应注意,在这种情况中,一般说来,有必要在定位负载的同时,使锁定器118保持在锁住状态,并且,位置传感器1046和1056不能用于检测运动障碍物。但是,在任何情况下,力传感器120都可以用于检测运动障碍物。In the case where the system is set so that the force threshold is not necessarily smaller than the resultant force of the static friction force and the breakaway force of the piston 130, the first three steps of the compliance preparation sequence 5 can be replaced by compliance preparation sequence 2 or compliance preparation sequence 3 . The resulting sequences are provided below. It should be noted that in this case, it is generally necessary to keep the lock 118 locked while positioning the load, and that the position sensors 1046 and 1056 cannot be used to detect moving obstacles. However, in any case, the force sensor 120 can be used to detect moving obstacles.

柔顺准备序列6(如图15(j)所示)(可应用于图10a和10b两者,其中,气压缸128用在定位锁定器118中,且平衡阈值大于静摩擦力和挣脱力)Compliant Prep Sequence 6 (shown in Figure 15(j)) (applicable to both Figures 10a and 10b, where pneumatic cylinder 128 is used in positioning locker 118 and balance threshold is greater than static friction and breakaway forces)

1.如步骤1590所示,解开锁定器118。1. As shown in step 1590, the lock 118 is unlocked.

2.如步骤1591所示,从缸128中排出气体,以便伸出的柔顺止动器522靠在锁定器118上。2. Exhaust gas from cylinder 128 so that extended compliant stop 522 rests against lock 118 as shown in step 1591 .

3.如步骤1592所示,调整BCAA致动器508b,以便它接近它冲程的中点或接近它所需柔顺中性位置(这个步骤要求使用众所周知的解决方案,包括使用位置传感器1046来探测致动器508b的驱动部件514b相对于它静止部件506b的位置。在一些情况中,致动器508b配有限位开关,检测驱动部件514b何时到达它游动的终点;可以以已知方式与定时器结合起来使用,获得所需结果)。3. As shown in step 1592, adjust the BCAA actuator 508b so that it is near the midpoint of its stroke or near its desired compliant neutral position (this step requires the use of well known solutions including the use of the position sensor 1046 to detect the actuation The position of the driving part 514b of the actuator 508b relative to its stationary part 506b. In some cases, the actuator 508b is equipped with a limit switch that detects when the driving part 514b reaches the end of its travel; to be used in combination to obtain the desired result).

4.如步骤1593所示,把气体注入缸128中,把缸气体压力增加到使活塞130挣脱和向上移动的点。4. As shown in step 1593, inject gas into the cylinder 128, increasing the cylinder gas pressure to the point where the piston 130 breaks free and moves upward.

5.如步骤1594所示,在借助于所示的位置传感器1046监视力杆112相对于锁定器118的位置的同时,继续调整缸128的气体压力,使活塞130,并因而使连杆114和力杆112继续移动。5. As shown in step 1594, while monitoring the position of force rod 112 relative to lock 118 by means of position sensor 1046 as shown, continue to adjust the gas pressure of cylinder 128 to make piston 130, and thus connecting rod 114 and The force rod 112 continues to move.

6.如步骤1595a所示,当力杆112到达相对于锁定器118的柔顺中性位置时,锁住锁定器118并停止调整缸128中的气体压力。6. When the lever 112 reaches the compliant neutral position relative to the lock 118, lock the lock 118 and stop adjusting the gas pressure in the cylinder 128, as shown in step 1595a.

7.如步骤1595b中的可替换实施例所示,如果系统是图10b所示那种类型,那么,利用BCAA致动器508b把活塞130定位在它柔顺中性位置上。7. As shown in an alternative embodiment in step 1595b, if the system is of the type shown in Figure 10b, then the piston 130 is positioned in its compliant neutral position using the BCAA actuator 508b.

8.如步骤1596所示,如果主臂1030还没有处在它的柔顺中性位置上(例如,通过设计),那么,锁住锁定器118,并利用BCAA致动器508c把主臂1030移动到它的柔顺中性位置上。8. As shown in step 1596, if the main arm 1030 is not already in its compliant neutral position (e.g., by design), then lock the lock 118 and move the main arm 1030 using the BCAA actuator 508c to its supple neutral position.

9.如步骤1596所示,执行平衡序列。9. As shown in step 1596, a balancing sequence is performed.

柔顺准备序列7(如图15(k)所示)(可应用于图10a和10b两者,其中,活塞130可以靠在缸128的底部,且平衡阈值大于静摩擦力和挣脱力)Compliant Preparatory Sequence 7 (shown in Figure 15(k)) (applicable to both Figures 10a and 10b, where the piston 130 can rest on the bottom of the cylinder 128 and the equilibrium threshold is greater than the static friction and breakaway forces)

1.如步骤1600所示,使致动器508c缩回到使缸128内活塞130到达它冲程的底部的位置(取决于设计,这可以由合并在致动器508a内的限位开关,通过沿着缩回方向驱动致动器508a足够长时间来达到完全缩回状态,或通过其它已知技术实现)。1. As shown in step 1600, retract actuator 508c to a position where piston 130 in cylinder 128 reaches the bottom of its stroke (depending on the design, this may be controlled by a limit switch incorporated in actuator 508a, via Actuator 508a is driven in the retracted direction long enough to achieve a fully retracted state, or by other known techniques).

2.如步骤1601所示,解开锁定器118。2. As shown in step 1601, unlock the locker 118 .

3.如步骤1602所示,从缸128中排出气体,以便活塞130靠在缸128的底部上。3. As shown in step 1602, the gas is exhausted from the cylinder 128 so that the piston 130 rests on the bottom of the cylinder 128.

4.如步骤1603所示,利用BCAA致动器508b,把锁定器118定位在柔顺中性位置上。4. As shown in step 1603, using the BCAA actuator 508b, position the lock 118 in the compliant neutral position.

5.如步骤1604所示,锁住锁定器118,并利用BCAA致动器508c把负载提升到活塞130相对于缸128处于柔顺中性位置(通常接近中点)的位置。5. As shown in step 1604, lock locker 118 and lift load using BCAA actuator 508c to a position where piston 130 is in a compliant neutral position relative to cylinder 128 (typically near midpoint).

6.如步骤1605所示,如果主臂1030还没有处在它的柔顺中性位置上(例如,通过设计),那么,利用BCAA致动器508c把主臂1030移动到它的柔顺中性位置上。6. As shown in step 1605, if the main arm 1030 is not already in its compliant neutral position (e.g., by design), then use the BCAA actuator 508c to move the main arm 1030 to its compliant neutral position superior.

7.如步骤1606所示,执行平衡序列。7. As shown in step 1606, a balancing sequence is performed.

图10c也是包括可伸缩柱1000的操纵器,这个可伸缩柱100与授予Holt等人的PCT申请PCT/US01/06456中描述的可伸缩柱类似。与前面所述一样,主臂1030利用线性导轨1058和直线引导轴承(未示出)可滑动地附在上段1001上。这提供了主臂1030相对于上段1001大约±1英寸的垂直微动。Figure 10c is also a manipulator comprising a telescoping column 1000 similar to that described in PCT Application PCT/US01/06456 to Holt et al. As previously described, main arm 1030 is slidably attached to upper section 1001 using linear guides 1058 and linear guide bearings (not shown). This provides about ± 1 inch of vertical inching of the main arm 1030 relative to the upper section 1001 .

第一线性致动器508a相对于固定的下段1004和基座1002沿着垂直方向移动柱1000的中段1002。图8a所示那种类型的BCAA适合于在垂直微动轴方向使上段1001相对于中段1002运动并提供平衡和柔顺状态。The first linear actuator 508a moves the middle section 1002 of the column 1000 in a vertical direction relative to the fixed lower section 1004 and the base 1002 . A BCAA of the type shown in Figure 8a is suitable for moving the upper section 1001 relative to the middle section 1002 in the direction perpendicular to the axis of fretting and providing a balanced and compliant state.

第二线性致动器1042的静止元件506b附在第一支架1040上,第一支架1040又附在中段1002上。致动器514b的远端附在BCAA锁定器118上。锁定器118附在第二支架1076上,该第二支架1076也附在上段1001上。于是,线性致动器508b驱动上段1001相对于中段1002的垂直运动。BCAA的气压缸128也附在第二支架1076上。力杆112和连杆114用于支承主臂1030。可以看出,包括第二线性致动器508b、气压缸128、活塞130、连杆114、力杆112、力传感器120、位置传感器1056、柔顺止动器522和524等的设备构成图8a所示那种类型的BCAA,且具有支架1076也附在可移动上段1001上的附加特征。The stationary element 506b of the second linear actuator 1042 is attached to the first bracket 1040 which is in turn attached to the midsection 1002 . The distal end of the actuator 514b is attached to the BCAA lock 118 . The lock 118 is attached to a second bracket 1076 which is also attached to the upper section 1001 . Thus, the linear actuator 508b drives the vertical movement of the upper section 1001 relative to the middle section 1002 . The pneumatic cylinder 128 of the BCAA is also attached to the second bracket 1076 . The force rod 112 and the connecting rod 114 are used to support the main arm 1030 . It can be seen that the equipment comprising the second linear actuator 508b, the pneumatic cylinder 128, the piston 130, the connecting rod 114, the force rod 112, the force sensor 120, the position sensor 1056, the compliant stoppers 522 and 524, etc. That type of BCAA is shown, with the added feature that bracket 1076 is also attached to movable upper section 1001.

有关主臂1030处在柔顺准备状态的条件与图10a和10b的那些条件相同。但是,由于不能如在图10a和10b中那样与上段1001独立地定位锁定器118,因此,情况更简单些。最终结果是,如果主臂1030处在它的柔顺中性位置,那么,锁定器也必须处在它有柔顺中性位置,反之亦然。如下的序列可以用于实现柔顺准备状态(“柔顺准备序列8”)The conditions for the master arm 1030 to be in a compliance ready state are the same as those of Figures 10a and 10b. However, the situation is simpler since the lock 118 cannot be positioned independently of the upper section 1001 as in Figures 10a and 10b. The end result is that if the main arm 1030 is in its compliant neutral position, then the lock must also be in its compliant neutral position, and vice versa. The following sequence can be used to achieve a compliance ready state ("Compliant Ready Sequence 8")

柔顺准备序列8(如图15(l)所示)Compliant preparation sequence 8 (as shown in Figure 15(l))

1.如步骤1610所示,解开锁定器118。1. As shown in step 1610, the lock 118 is unlocked.

2.如步骤1611所示,从缸128中排出气体,以便使主臂1030靠在下主臂止动器1054上和/或使伸出的柔顺止动器522靠在第二支架1076上(注意,在这种情况下,第二支架1076和下主臂止动器1054两者都固定在上段1001上)。2. As shown in step 1611, exhaust gas from the cylinder 128 so that the main arm 1030 rests on the lower main arm stop 1054 and/or the extended compliant stop 522 rests on the second bracket 1076 (note , in which case both the second bracket 1076 and the lower main arm stop 1054 are secured to the upper section 1001).

3.如步骤1612所示,把气体注入缸128中,使缸气体压力增加到使活塞130挣脱和向上移动的点。3. As shown in step 1612, inject gas into the cylinder 128 to increase the cylinder gas pressure to the point where the piston 130 breaks free and moves upward.

4.如步骤1613所示,在监视主臂位置传感器1056的同时,继续调整缸气体压力,使活塞130,并因而分别使连杆和力杆114和112、和主臂1030继续向上移动。4. As shown in step 1613, while monitoring the master arm position sensor 1056, continue to adjust the cylinder gas pressure to continue to move the piston 130, and thus the connecting rods and force rods 114 and 112, respectively, and the master arm 1030 upwardly.

5.如步骤1614所示,当力杆112和主臂1030到达它们的柔顺中性位置时,锁住锁定器118并停止调整缸128中的气体压力。5. As shown in step 1614, when force rod 112 and main arm 1030 reach their compliant neutral position, lock lock 118 and stop adjusting the gas pressure in cylinder 128.

6.如步骤1615所示,执行平衡序列。6. As shown in step 1615, a balancing sequence is performed.

如果平衡序列力阈值小于静摩擦力和活塞130的挣脱力的合力,那么,由于致动器508用于把主臂1030和它支承的负载驱动到所需垂直位置,因此可以解开锁定器118,并且让它保持在解开状态。否则,应该使锁定器118保持在锁住状态,直到实现负载由对接设备部分支承的准备对接状态(或其它所需状态)。If the equilibrium sequence force threshold is less than the resultant of the static friction force and the breakaway force of the piston 130, then the lock 118 can be disengaged since the actuator 508 is used to drive the main arm 1030 and the load it supports to the desired vertical position, And keep it unwrapped. Otherwise, the lock 118 should be maintained in the locked condition until the ready-to-dock condition (or other desired condition) in which the load is partially supported by the docking device is achieved.

从上面可以看出,在这种情况下,一个位置传感器1056就足够了。As can be seen from the above, one position sensor 1056 is sufficient in this case.

图11示出了用在单个测试头操纵器1101中本发明的各种示范性实施例中的几个。图11中的操纵器1101含有如授予Holt等人的美国专利申请09/646,072中描述的基座1103、固定柱1000、和支承在前面图9(b)中所述那种类型的测试头100的主臂1030(注意,图11中的测试头100以剖面图的形式显示出来,并为了简单起见,在图11中没有重复图9(b)所示的对接硬件-以及内部俯仰和横摆旋转机构)。操纵器1101拥有七根运动轴,3根平动轴和4根转动轴。平动轴是内-外轴1128、左-右轴1126、和上-下(或垂直)轴1130。转动轴是绕基座旋转的偏转轴1115、俯仰轴1113、横摆轴1117、和绕测试头100旋转的横滚轴1111。典型的运动要求是内外±10英寸、左右±5英寸、垂直±30英寸、偏转30多度、横滚±95度、俯仰±5度、和横摆±5度。在这个实施例中,所有操纵器轴的运动都由运动驱动致动器施加动力。致动器由中心控制器(未示出)控制,使测试头100在操纵器1101运动包迹内从一个位置和方向移动到另一个位置和方向。可以使用在数根轴上实现控制以控制运动的许多技术的任何一种。在所有轴上使用适当的位置传感器,以便把反馈提供给控制器。FIG. 11 shows a few of the various exemplary embodiments of the present invention used in a single test head manipulator 1101 . Manipulator 1101 in FIG. 11 contains base 1103 as described in U.S. Patent Application 09/646,072 issued to Holt et al., fixed post 1000, and supports a test head 100 of the type previously described in FIG. 9( b). main arm 1030 of the main arm 1030 (note that the test head 100 in Figure 11 is shown in cross-section, and for simplicity, the docking hardware shown in Figure 9(b) is not repeated in Figure 11 - as well as the internal pitch and roll rotating mechanism). The manipulator 1101 has seven axes of motion, three axes of translation and four axes of rotation. The translational axes are medial-outer axis 1128 , left-right axis 1126 , and up-down (or vertical) axis 1130 . The rotation axes are the yaw axis 1115 which rotates around the base, the pitch axis 1113 , the roll axis 1117 , and the roll axis 1111 which rotates around the test head 100 . Typical motion requirements are ±10 inches inside and outside, ±5 inches side to side, ±30 inches vertical, 30+ degrees yaw, ±95 degrees roll, ±5 degrees pitch, and ±5 degrees yaw. In this embodiment, movement of all manipulator axes is powered by motion drive actuators. The actuators are controlled by a central controller (not shown) to move the test head 100 from one position and orientation to another within the manipulator 1101 motion envelope. Any of a number of techniques that implement control over several axes to control motion can be used. Use appropriate position sensors on all axes to provide feedback to the controller.

在这种操纵器1101中,绳索枢轴环组件924被安装在主臂1030上附着的支架1114的末端。测试头100由固定在测试头固定件926上的测试头支承梁922来支承。测试头固定件926与绳索枢轴环924的可旋转环1102耦合,以便支承梁922的中心线穿过可旋转环1102的中心,并且与可旋转环1102的平面垂直。设备被配置成使测试头100能够绕由支承梁922的中心线限定的轴,即,运动的横滚轴111旋转±95度。In this manipulator 1101 , the cable pivot ring assembly 924 is mounted on the end of a bracket 1114 attached to the main arm 1030 . Test head 100 is supported by test head support beam 922 secured to test head mount 926 . Test head mount 926 is coupled to rotatable ring 1102 of cable pivot ring 924 such that the centerline of support beam 922 passes through the center of rotatable ring 1102 and is perpendicular to the plane of rotatable ring 1102 . The apparatus is configured to enable the test head 100 to rotate ±95 degrees about the axis defined by the centerline of the support beam 922 , ie, the roll axis of motion 111 .

在图11中,横滚轴1111穿过测试头100的重心,使得横滚基本上是平衡的和无有效重量的。因此,测试头100绕横滚轴的运动可以借助于如授予Holt等人的美国专利申请09/646,072所述的电机电机-变速箱-离合器布局来供应动力。当电机(未示出)没有受到驱动时,离合器脱离,允许绕横滚轴1111作平衡柔顺运动。In FIG. 11 , the roll axis 1111 passes through the center of gravity of the test head 100 so that the roll is substantially balanced and free of effective weight. Accordingly, movement of the test head 100 about the roll axis can be powered by means of a motor motor-gearbox-clutch arrangement as described in US Patent Application Serial No. 09/646,072 to Holt et al. When the motor (not shown) is not being driven, the clutch is disengaged, allowing balanced and compliant motion about the roll axis 1111.

测试头100的俯仰轴1113和横摆轴1117没有穿过测试头100的重心。如图9(a)所示和前面所讨论的俯仰BCAA 932和横摆BCAA 930耦合在测试头100和测试头固定件926之间。在图11中将这些分别示意性表示成机构1106和机构1112。其细节与图9(a)中的相同。这两个BCAA 1106和1112用于分别相对于它的俯仰轴和横摆轴定位测试头100,以及为对接或/或手工操作提供平衡、柔顺运动。在这两个俯仰轴和横摆轴1113和1117中分别提供了±5度的移动范围。The pitch axis 1113 and the yaw axis 1117 of the test head 100 do not pass through the center of gravity of the test head 100 . A pitch BCAA 932 and a roll BCAA 930 as shown in FIG. 9( a ) and previously discussed are coupled between the test head 100 and the test head mount 926. These are shown schematically in Figure 11 as mechanism 1106 and mechanism 1112, respectively. The details are the same as in Fig. 9(a). The two BCAAs 1106 and 1112 are used to position the test head 100 relative to its pitch and yaw axes, respectively, and to provide balanced, compliant motion for docking or/or manual manipulation. A range of movement of ±5 degrees is provided in the two pitch and yaw axes 1113 and 1117, respectively.

测试头100的垂直移动可以通过包括如前面针对图10(d)、10(e)和10(f)所示的可替换装置所讨论的BCAA的布置来提供。在图11中,图10(e)的布置被明确地显示成机构1118(请注意,在图11中没有显示柔软气体导管和高压气体供应器)。可以看出,如果可伸缩柱用于取代固定柱1000,那么,可以使用如图10(a)、10(b)、或10(c)所示那些类型之一的布置。图11中的系统被设计成使静摩擦力加上气压缸128的挣脱力大于平衡力阈值,以便测试头100可以在锁定器118解开状态下沿垂直方向定位。Vertical movement of the test head 100 may be provided by an arrangement including a BCAA as previously discussed for the alternative arrangements shown in Figures 10(d), 10(e) and 10(f). In Fig. 11, the arrangement of Fig. 10(e) is shown explicitly as mechanism 1118 (note that the flexible gas conduit and high pressure gas supply are not shown in Fig. 11). It can be seen that if a telescoping column is used in place of the fixed column 1000, then one of the types of arrangements shown in Figures 10(a), 10(b), or 10(c) could be used. The system in FIG. 11 is designed such that the static friction force plus the breakaway force of the pneumatic cylinder 128 is greater than the balance force threshold so that the test head 100 can be positioned vertically with the lock 118 unlocked.

基底1103中的偏转运动在水平面内,并且通过图11中示意性地表示成机构1120的柔顺驱动机构来实现。一般来说,沿着该轴的运动基本上是平衡的,且不承受外力。在这种情况下,原则上可以使用如图5(a)、5(b)、5(c)或7的任何一个所示那种类型的柔顺驱动机构。由于大约30多度的偏转运动要求行程充分长的致动器,因此,图5(a)和图7是优选的。但是,在某些应用中,把测试头100连接到测试柜(未示出)上的粗的、稍微有弹性的测试头绳索(未示出)可以沿着这根轴施加对运动产生影响的随位置改变的力。在这种情况中,BCAA可以用作机构1120,提供驱动,以及平衡柔顺状态。可以采用如图6(b)所示那样的BCAA配置。此外,图8(a)或8(b)所示那种类型的BCAA可以类似地适用于这种应用。The deflection motion in the base 1103 is in the horizontal plane and is achieved by a compliant drive mechanism shown schematically as mechanism 1120 in FIG. 11 . Generally, motion along this axis is substantially balanced and free from external forces. In this case, a compliant drive mechanism of the type shown in any of Figures 5(a), 5(b), 5(c) or 7 could in principle be used. Figures 5(a) and 7 are preferred since a deflection movement of about 30+ degrees requires a sufficiently long stroke actuator. However, in some applications, a thick, slightly elastic test head cord (not shown) connecting the test head 100 to the test cabinet (not shown) may apply a force along this axis that affects the motion. Force that varies with position. In this case, the BCAA can be used as mechanism 1120, providing actuation, and balancing the compliant state. A BCAA configuration as shown in Figure 6(b) can be used. Furthermore, BCAAs of the type shown in Figure 8(a) or 8(b) may be similarly suitable for this application.

类似地,基底1103的内-外和左-右运动也在水平面内。与这些轴有关的柔顺驱动机构在图11中也分别示意性表示成机构1122和机构1124。与偏转运动一样,沿着这些轴的运动基本上是平衡的,不承受外力。在这些轴中所需的运动范围通常从±5英寸到±10英寸。因此,最好选择图5(a)或图7的机构来提供所需行程。在显著的可变绳索力存在于系统之中的情况下,可以采用和利用图6(a)、6(b)、8(a)、或8(b)所示那些类型的BCAA机构,这对水平轴有利。Similarly, the in-out and left-right motions of the base 1103 are also in the horizontal plane. The compliant drive mechanisms associated with these axes are also schematically represented in Figure 11 as mechanism 1122 and mechanism 1124, respectively. As with deflection motion, motion along these axes is essentially balanced and bears no external force. The required range of motion in these axes is typically from ±5 inches to ±10 inches. Therefore, it is best to choose the mechanism of Figure 5(a) or Figure 7 to provide the required stroke. BCAA mechanisms of the type shown in Figures 6(a), 6(b), 8(a), or 8(b) may be employed and utilized where significant variable rope forces exist in the system, which Good for the horizontal axis.

应该注意到,图11所示的BCAA和柔顺驱动机构被显示在看得见位置中,这使描述和讨论更加清楚。在实际装置中,某些机构或它们的一部分从给定视角看过去是看不见的。例如,机构1120、1122和1124的部件通常与其它部件一起处在包括操纵器基底1103在内的各种平板之间。此外,还例如,机构1118可以处在操纵器柱1105的一侧或另一侧上或背面上。It should be noted that the BCAA and compliant drive mechanism shown in FIG. 11 are shown in view for clarity of description and discussion. In practical devices, certain mechanisms or parts of them are invisible from a given viewing angle. For example, components of mechanisms 1120, 1122, and 1124 are typically located among various plates, including manipulator base 1103, along with other components. Also, for example, mechanism 1118 may be on one side or the other side or back of manipulator post 1105 .

有关对接的信息Information about docking

参照图11解释致动器驱动对接的示范性实施例。在图11中,操纵器1101用于使测试头进入对接位置的准备状态,然后,分离的、独立的对接致动器(未示出)把测试头100拖入最后或完全对接位置中。各种类型的引导机构,例如,导销和小孔、运动机构等是已知的,以保证使测试头100适当地和精确地与器件处理器/检测器(未示出)对准。当操作致动器时,测试头100必须相对于操纵器1101柔顺地移动。当完成对接时,可以是致动器机构的机构把测试头安全地锁闩在某一位置中。An exemplary embodiment of an actuator-driven docking is explained with reference to FIG. 11 . In FIG. 11 , manipulator 1101 is used to prepare the test head for a docked position, and then a separate, independent docking actuator (not shown) draws test head 100 into the final or fully docked position. Various types of guide mechanisms, eg, guide pins and holes, kinematic mechanisms, etc., are known to ensure proper and precise alignment of test head 100 with a device handler/detector (not shown). The test head 100 must move compliantly relative to the manipulator 1101 when operating the actuator. A mechanism, which may be an actuator mechanism, securely latches the test head in a certain position when docking is complete.

随着测试头100越来越大,‘815对接件的基本思想已经演变成含有三到四组通过绳索915互连的导销912、导销插孔912a、和圆形凸轮910的对接件。本申请的图12(a)、12(b)、12(c)、和12(d)显示了含有4个导销912和小孔(插孔)912a组合和四个圆形凸轮910的对接件。尽管这样的四点对接被构造成含有附在四个凸轮910每一个上的致动器把柄,但是,所示的对接件还包含附在绳索驱动器917上的单个致动器把柄914。当通过对接把柄914使绳索驱动器917旋转时,这种布置使单个致动器把柄处在操作者用起来方便的位置中。此外,通过适当地调整凸轮910的直径与绳索驱动器的直径的比例,可以获得更大的机械优点。As test heads 100 have grown larger, the basic idea of the '815 dock has evolved to a dock containing three to four sets of guide pins 912 interconnected by cords 915, guide pin receptacles 912a, and circular cams 910. Figures 12(a), 12(b), 12(c), and 12(d) of the present application show a combination of four guide pins 912 and small holes (receptacles) 912a and four circular cams 910 for docking pieces. Although such a four-point dock is configured to include an actuator handle attached to each of the four cams 910 , the illustrated dock also includes a single actuator handle 914 attached to a cord drive 917 . This arrangement places the single actuator handle in a convenient position for the operator when the cord driver 917 is rotated by the docking handle 914 . Furthermore, by properly adjusting the ratio of the diameter of the cam 910 to the diameter of the cable drive, greater mechanical advantage can be obtained.

现在更详细地考虑图12(a)到12(d)。图12(a)用透视方式显示了固定在支架200中的测试头100,支架200又被操纵器(未示出)支承着。所示的还有测试头100可以与之对接的器件处理器1208的剖开片段。图12(b)以稍微大一些的比例并更详细地示出了器件处理器1208(再一次提醒读者,这里不失一般性地使用术语“处理器”来指包括插件式器件处理器、晶片检测器等在内的各种测试设备的任何一种)。先简要地看一下图12(c)中的剖面图,可以看出,测试头100含有电气接口1226,而器件处理器1208含有相应的电气接口1228。电气接口1226和1228通常含有数百个或数千个微小、精密的电触点,这些电触点必须以当测试头最终对接时,以提供可靠的相应单独电连接的方式精密接合。正如在这种示范性情况中所示的那样,器件处理器1208的下表面包含处理器电气接口1228,且测试头100一般来说通过从下而上的运动对接。其它的方向也是可以的,并且是已知的,包括:借助于向下运动与上表面对接,借助于水平运动与垂直面对接,和与水平和垂直面两者成某一角度的平面对接。Figures 12(a) to 12(d) are now considered in more detail. Figure 12(a) shows in perspective the test head 100 fixed in the frame 200, which in turn is supported by a manipulator (not shown). Also shown is a cut-away section of device handler 1208 with which test head 100 may interface. Figure 12(b) shows device processor 1208 on a slightly larger scale and in more detail (again, the reader is reminded that the term "processor" is used here without loss of generality to include plug-in device processors, on-chip Any of various test equipment including detectors, etc.). Looking briefly at the cross-sectional view in FIG. 12( c ), it can be seen that the test head 100 includes an electrical interface 1226 and the device handler 1208 includes a corresponding electrical interface 1228 . Electrical interfaces 1226 and 1228 typically contain hundreds or thousands of tiny, delicate electrical contacts that must be precision-engaged in a manner that provides a reliable corresponding individual electrical connection when the test heads are finally docked. As shown in this exemplary case, the lower surface of the device handler 1208 contains the handler electrical interface 1228, and the test head 100 is generally docked with a bottom-up motion. Other orientations are also possible and known, including: interface with the upper surface by means of downward motion, interface with the vertical surface with the aid of horizontal motion, and interface with a plane at an angle to both the horizontal and vertical planes .

返回到图12(a)和12(b),这些图所示的是完全四点对接设备;它的一些部分附在器件处理器1208上或附在测试头100上。附在测试头100上的是面板1206。四个导销912附在面板1206的四个角上,并且处在面板1206的四个角附近。面板1206具有中心孔,并且附在测试头100上,以便测试头电气接口1226穿过小孔伸出来,并且导销912定义了与电接口1226几乎同心的近似长方形。Returning to FIGS. 12( a ) and 12 ( b ), these figures show a complete four-point docking device; Attached to test head 100 is faceplate 1206 . Four guide pins 912 are attached to and near the four corners of panel 1206 . Faceplate 1206 has a central hole and is attached to test head 100 so that test head electrical interface 1226 protrudes through the aperture, and guide pins 912 define an approximate rectangle that is nearly concentric with electrical interface 1226 .

角板1214附在器件处理器1208的下表面上。角板1214具有中心孔,并且附在器件处理器1208上,以便处理器电气接口1228穿过小孔伸出来。四个角片1216附在角板1214上,每一个分别处在它四个角的每一个角附近。每个角片1216含有钻在其中的导销小孔或插孔912a。每个导销小孔912a对于各自的导销912。将这些安排成当对接时,每个导销912将完全插入它各自的导销小孔912a中。因此,导销912和导销小孔912a保证了测试头和器件处理器之间的对准。A gusset 1214 is attached to the lower surface of the device handler 1208 . Gusset 1214 has a central hole and is attached to device processor 1208 so that processor electrical interface 1228 protrudes through the hole. Four corner pieces 1216 are attached to the corner plate 1214, one each adjacent each of its four corners. Each gusset 1216 has a guide pin aperture or receptacle 912a drilled therein. Each guide pin aperture 912a is for a respective guide pin 912 . These are arranged so that when mated, each guide pin 912 will be fully inserted into its respective guide pin aperture 912a. Thus, guide pins 912 and guide pin apertures 912a ensure alignment between the test head and the device handler.

四个对接凸轮910可旋转地附在面板1206上。凸轮910是圆形的,并且与‘815专利中所述的那些类似。尤其是,每个凸轮910存在环绕着它圆周的侧螺旋槽,以及在上表面上的上切口。每个对接凸轮910处在各自导销912的附近,使得它一般被定心在大约从测试头电接口1226的中心延伸出来,穿过各自导销912的直线上,从而使导销912位于凸轮910和测试头电接口1226之间。角片1216和角板1214的角具有圆形的切口,使得当导销912完全插入角片中的导销小孔912a中时,每个凸轮910的圆周与它各自角片1216中的圆形切口邻接,并且与它各自角片1216中的圆形切口同心。这种布置保证了当首次对测试头100进行操作,使之进入对器件处理器1208对接的位置中时,对接部件之间的初始导向对准。Four docking cams 910 are rotatably attached to the panel 1206 . Cam 910 is circular and similar to those described in the '815 patent. In particular, each cam 910 presents a side helical groove around its circumference, and an upper cutout on the upper surface. Each docking cam 910 is positioned adjacent to a respective guide pin 912 such that it is generally centered on a line extending approximately from the center of the test head electrical interface 1226 through the respective guide pin 912 such that the guide pin 912 is positioned on the cam. 910 and the test head electrical interface 1226. The corners of the corner piece 1216 and the corner plate 1214 have circular cutouts so that when the guide pin 912 is fully inserted into the guide pin aperture 912a in the corner piece, the circumference of each cam 910 matches the circular shape in its respective corner piece 1216. The cutouts are contiguous and concentric with the circular cutouts in their respective corner pieces 1216 . This arrangement ensures an initial guided alignment between the docking components when the test head 100 is first manipulated into a docking position for the device handler 1208 .

带有附属对接把柄914的圆形绳索驱动器917也可旋转地附在面板1206上。对接绳索917附在凸轮910的每一个上,并附在绳索驱动器917上。滑轮1224适当地引导到绳索驱动器917和来自绳索驱动器914的绳索的路径。通过把力施加到把柄914上,可以使绳索驱动器917旋转。随着绳索驱动器917旋转起来,它把力传递给又使凸轮910同步旋转的绳索915。A circular cord driver 917 with attached docking handle 914 is also rotatably attached to panel 1206 . Docking cables 917 are attached to each of the cams 910 and to a cable driver 917. The pulley 1224 guides the path of the rope to and from the rope drive 917 as appropriate. By applying force to the handle 914, the cord driver 917 can be rotated. As the cord driver 917 rotates, it transfers force to the cord 915 which in turn causes the cam 910 to rotate synchronously.

从每个角片1216的圆形切口延伸出来的是凸轮跟随器1210。凸轮跟随器1210配合到其相应凸轮910的上表面上的上切口内。图12(c)以剖面图的形式示出了测试头100与处理器910对接的过程中的一个阶段。这里,导销912部分插入角片1216中的导销小孔912a中。应注意,在这个示范性情况中,导销912在接近其远端处逐渐变细,并且在较接近它们附在面板1206上的点的地方,具有不变的直径。在图12(c)中,已经把导销912插入导销小孔912a中,直到不变直径的区域正好进入导销小孔912a中的点。并且在图12(c)中,已经把每个凸轮跟随器1210插入其相应凸轮910的上表面上的上切口中,直到它处在凸轮螺旋槽的最上端的深度。在这种配置中,对接件作好通过把力施加到把柄上和使凸轮旋转而被驱动的准备。于是,这种配置可以被称为“准备驱动”位置。Extending from the circular cutout of each gusset 1216 is a cam follower 1210 . Cam followers 1210 fit into upper notches on the upper surface of their respective cams 910 . FIG. 12( c ) shows a stage in the process of interfacing the test head 100 with the handler 910 in cross-sectional view. Here, guide pin 912 is partially inserted into guide pin aperture 912a in gusset 1216 . Note that in this exemplary case, the guide pins 912 taper near their distal ends and have a constant diameter closer to their point of attachment to the panel 1206 . In Figure 12(c), the guide pin 912 has been inserted into the guide pin aperture 912a to the point where the region of constant diameter just enters the guide pin aperture 912a. And in FIG. 12( c ), each cam follower 1210 has been inserted into the upper cutout on the upper surface of its corresponding cam 910 until it is at the depth of the uppermost end of the cam helical groove. In this configuration, the abutment is ready to be actuated by applying force to the handle and rotating the cam. Thus, this configuration may be referred to as a "ready to drive" position.

图12(d)以剖面图的形式示出了凸轮910全速旋转导致的结果。测试头100现在完全与处理器1208对接。可以看出,凸轮910已经旋转起来,并且已经使凸轮跟随器1210沿着螺旋槽走到更接近面板1206的点。另外,导销912完全插入它们相应的导销小孔912a中。可以看出,导销912的不变直径区和相应导销小孔912a之间配合的紧密程度决定处理器电接口1228和测试头电气接口1226之间的最后对准。Figure 12(d) shows the result of full rotation of the cam 910 in a cross-sectional view. Test head 100 is now fully interfaced with processor 1208 . It can be seen that the cam 910 has rotated and has brought the cam follower 1210 along the helical groove to a point closer to the panel 1206 . In addition, the guide pins 912 are fully inserted into their corresponding guide pin apertures 912a. It can be seen that the tightness of fit between the constant diameter region of the guide pin 912 and the corresponding guide pin aperture 912a determines the final alignment between the processor electrical interface 1228 and the test head electrical interface 1226 .

根据前述讨论,现在更全面地讨论对接过程和定义某些术语是合适的。对接的目的是精确地将测试头电气接口1226与处理器电气接口1228配合。每个电气接口1226和1228限定一个平面,该平面通常,但非必须与电气接口的顶端名义上平行。当对接时,这两个平面必须相互平行。为了防止对电触点的损害,最好在使电触点与机构触点相互机械接触之前,首先在五个自由度中对准两个接口1226和1228。如果在对接位置中,接口限定的平面与图14的X-Y平面平行,那么,必须在X、Y和θZ方向对准,以便使各个触点相互排齐。另外,通过沿着θX和θY方向的转动,使两个平面平行。使两个电气交接面相互平行的过程被称为“接口”的平面化;并且,当已经实现平面化时,可以认为接口是“平面化的”或“共面的”。一旦在X、Y和θZ方向被平面化和对准,通过促使在与处理器电接口1228的平面垂直的Z方向的运动,继续进行对准。在对接过程中,首先把测试头100移动到处理器1208附近。进一步的移动使角片1216的圆形切口首先与凸轮910对准。这个位置,或者正好在这个位置之前的那个位置,可以被认为是“准备对接”位置。更明确地说,“准备对接”位置指的是某个第一导向对准装置才刚刚接合或在要接合的位置附近的位置。在这个阶段,取决于设计细节,导销的远端准备进入它们相应的导孔中。再继续移动将把测试头带入前面针对图12(a)到(d)所讨论的“准备驱动位置”。更明确地说,“准备驱动位置”指的是测试头已经到达可以驱动对接设备的位置。在准备对接位置上,已经实现了在X、Y和θZ方向的近似平面化和对准。随着对接件受到驱动且导销912更完全地插入它们各自的导销小孔912a中,对接和平面化变得更加准确。In light of the foregoing discussion, it is now appropriate to discuss the docking process more fully and to define certain terms. The purpose of the docking is to precisely mate the test head electrical interface 1226 with the processor electrical interface 1228 . Each electrical interface 1226 and 1228 defines a plane that is typically, but not necessarily, nominally parallel to the top end of the electrical interface. When docked, these two planes must be parallel to each other. To prevent damage to the electrical contacts, it is preferable to first align the two interfaces 1226 and 1228 in five degrees of freedom before bringing the electrical and mechanical contacts into mechanical contact with each other. If, in the mated position, the plane defined by the interface is parallel to the X-Y plane of Figure 14, then alignment must be in the X, Y and ΘZ directions in order for the contacts to align with each other. In addition, the two planes are made parallel by rotation in the θX and θY directions. The process of making two electrical interfaces parallel to each other is called planarization of the "interface"; and, when planarization has been achieved, the interface can be said to be "planarized" or "coplanar." Once planarized and aligned in the X, Y, and θZ directions, alignment continues by causing motion in the Z direction perpendicular to the plane of the processor electrical interface 1228 . During the docking process, the test head 100 is first moved near the handler 1208 . Further movement aligns the circular cutout of the gusset 1216 with the cam 910 first. This position, or the position just before this position, may be considered the "ready to dock" position. More specifically, a "ready-to-dock" position refers to a position in which a first guide alignment device has just been engaged or is about to be engaged. At this stage, depending on design details, the distal ends of the guide pins are prepared to enter their respective guide holes. Further movement will bring the test head into the "ready to drive position" discussed above with respect to Figures 12(a) to (d). More specifically, "ready to drive position" means that the test head has reached a position where it can drive the docking device. In the ready-to-dock position, approximate planarization and alignment in the X, Y, and θZ directions has been achieved. Mating and planarization become more accurate as the mating members are actuated and the guide pins 912 are more fully inserted into their respective guide pin apertures 912a.

一般说来,准备驱动位置是对接件的两个半部中的对准机构至少已经部分接合和已经实现了一些,但未必所有轴已经实现对准的位置。例如,在如‘815专利所述那种类型的对接件和如图9(a)和(b)及12(a)到(d)所述那种类型的那些对接件中,这是如上所述,逐渐变细的导销912已经进一步插入导销小孔912a中,致使处理器1208上的凸轮跟随器1210已经插入对接凸轮910中的位置。这样,测试头100通常在千分之几英寸内和在大约1度共面性内与目标设备对准。作为另一个例子,在如美国专利5,982,182(特此引用,以供参考)所述的对接件中,这是运动触点已经接合且系统准备好进行与目标垂直的最终直线运动的位置。In general, the ready-to-drive position is one in which the alignment mechanisms in the two halves of the docking member have at least partially engaged and some, but not necessarily all, axis alignment has been achieved. For example, in docking members of the type described in the '815 patent and those of the type described in Figures 9(a) and (b) and 12(a) to (d), this is as stated above As described above, the tapered guide pin 912 has been further inserted into the guide pin aperture 912a such that the cam follower 1210 on the handler 1208 has been inserted into position in the docking cam 910. As such, test head 100 is typically aligned with the target device to within a few thousandths of an inch and within approximately 1 degree of coplanarity. As another example, in a docking member as described in US Pat. No. 5,982,182 (hereby incorporated by reference), this is the position where the moving contacts have engaged and the system is ready for final linear motion perpendicular to the target.

对上述问题的解决方案适用于本文在图1(a)到4(b)中所述(Ny等人的美国临时申请60/234,598中所述)的平衡系统,并且也适用于本文在图6(a)到9(b)中所述的BCAA。这些具有几个共同方面;一个方面是,平衡系统是BCAA的组成部分。于是,可以按要求把BCAA和/或平衡系统加入操纵器和测试头100中,以便在需要或想要的地方达到平衡和柔顺状态。The solution to the above problem applies to the balancing system described herein in Figures 1(a) to 4(b) (described in U.S. Provisional Application 60/234,598 to Ny et al.), and also to the balance system described herein in Figure 6. BCAAs described in (a) to 9(b). These have several aspects in common; one is that the balance system is an integral part of the BCAA. Thus, BCAAs and/or balance systems can be added to the manipulator and test head 100 as required to achieve balance and compliance where needed or desired.

在本申请中,如前所述,可以在对接之前,使测试头100进入和锁定在柔顺中性位置中。正好在在非常接近对接系统进行最后对接之前,可以使一根轴或数根轴保持平衡,使它或它们处在柔顺准备状态。由于这是通过把锁定器118锁住实现的,因此,不存在测试头100作突然的、不可预测的、和可能危险的运动的风险。然后,借助于处在柔顺准备状态的系统,解开测试头118,使它作柔顺运动,继续进行对接。In this application, the test head 100 may be brought into and locked in a compliant neutral position prior to docking, as previously described. Just before the final docking in very close proximity to the docking system, the shaft or shafts can be balanced so that it or they are in a compliant state. Since this is accomplished by locking the lock 118, there is no risk of sudden, unpredictable, and potentially dangerous movement of the test head 100. Then, with the system in a compliant state, the test head 118 is undocked for a compliant motion to continue docking.

正如本文早些时候所指出的那样,压力传感器(606a,606b)可以合并入内并布置成测量气压缸128的每个进口上的气体压力。控制器(未示出)接收来自压力传感器的、指示测量压力的信号。本文在前面描述了压力传感器在脱离之前用于恢复平衡状态。无需这种方法,正常操作就可以在平衡系统锁定器锁住的情况下使测试头100脱离,这放弃了在脱离的时候作柔顺运动的机会。As noted earlier herein, pressure sensors ( 606 a , 606 b ) may be incorporated and arranged to measure the gas pressure on each inlet of the pneumatic cylinder 128 . A controller (not shown) receives a signal from the pressure sensor indicative of the measured pressure. This paper previously described the use of pressure sensors to restore a state of equilibrium prior to disengagement. Without this approach, normal operation would disengage the test head 100 with the balance system lock locked, which forgoes the opportunity for compliant movement during disengagement.

压力传感器(606a,606b)也可以用在在对接测试头100的整个时间内和在继续进行测试的时候保持平衡状态的系统中。为了完成这个任务,使测试头100进入准备对接的位置。具有平衡系统或BCAA的所有轴进入柔顺准备状态。也就是说,使它们保持平衡,并且使它们处在柔顺中性区域。然后,由控制器测量和记录气压缸128中的压力。接着,释放锁定器118并对接测试头100。根据对接系统的类型和应用,当最后对接测试头100时,可以、也可以不重新锁住锁定器118。在对接测试头100的同时,控制器不断监视气压缸128中的压力,将它们与记录值相比较,并且操纵阀门604,以便保持缸压力基本不变。这样就维持了作用在活塞130和连杆114上的基本不变力并使系统保持在所需平衡状态。显然,对于在平衡状态可得到的柔顺运动,可以使测试头100脱离。Pressure sensors (606a, 606b) may also be used in systems that maintain a balanced state throughout the time test head 100 is docked and as testing continues. To accomplish this task, the test head 100 is brought into a ready-to-dock position. All axes with a balance system or BCAA go into compliance readiness. That is, keep them balanced, and keep them in the pliable neutral zone. The pressure in the pneumatic cylinder 128 is then measured and recorded by the controller. Next, the latch 118 is released and the test head 100 is docked. Depending on the type and application of the docking system, the lock 118 may or may not be re-locked when the test head 100 is finally docked. While the test head 100 is docked, the controller constantly monitors the pressure in the pneumatic cylinder 128, compares them to recorded values, and manipulates the valve 604 so as to maintain the cylinder pressure substantially constant. This maintains a substantially constant force on the piston 130 and connecting rod 114 and keeps the system in the desired state of equilibrium. Clearly, the test head 100 can be disengaged for the compliant motion available in equilibrium.

更具体地说,对接系统是锁闩型的还是非锁闩型的将决定可用的操作模式。锁闩对接件在这两种操作模式之间提供了如下选择:More specifically, whether the docking system is latching or non-latching will determine the available modes of operation. The latch dock provides a choice between these two modes of operation as follows:

1.在对接测试头100的同时通过解脱锁定器118保持平衡(如上所述)。在脱离的同时,通过解开锁定器118,保持平衡和作柔顺运动的机会。1. Maintain balance by disengaging lock 118 while docking test head 100 (as described above). By disengaging the lock 118 while disengaging, the opportunity for balance and compliant movement is maintained.

2.在对接测试头100的同时,通过锁住锁定器118,不保持平衡。对于脱离,存在两种分选择:2. While docking the test head 100, by locking the locker 118, the balance is not maintained. For disengagement, there are two sub-choices:

a.在脱离之前恢复平衡,且在脱离同时通过解开锁定器118保留作柔顺运动的机会。a. Restoring balance prior to disengagement and preserving the opportunity for compliant movement by disengaging the lock 118 while disengaging.

b.在脱离同时,不恢复平衡,且锁定器118必须保持锁住。这种方法不需要压力传感器。b. While disengaging, no balance is restored and the lock 118 must remain locked. This method does not require a pressure sensor.

在非锁闩对接系统中,一般说来,在对接测试头100的时候,需要锁住锁定器118。根据柔顺运动的需要,在脱离之前可以、也可以不恢复平衡。In non-latch docking systems, generally speaking, when the test head 100 is docked, the latch 118 needs to be locked. Balance may or may not be restored prior to disengagement, as required by the compliance movement.

现在考虑使用锁闩、致动器驱动对接的系统中的操作。这是目前使用得最广泛那种类型的系统。可以把像美国专利第4,589,815号所述那样的基本两点对接设备推广到包括如前面所述的、如图9(a)、9(b)和12(a)到(d)所示的三组或四组导销912、导销小孔912a和绳索驱动器。这样的二组、三组和四组对接件广泛用在这个目的的工业中。尽管这样的设备可以由操作者通过把力施加到对接把柄914上手工驱动,但是,包括电机、电或气体线性致动器、和/或真空操作器件的其它类型对接致动器也是已知的。一般说来,测试头100将与插件式器件处理器、晶片检测器或其它可能设备对接,这些设备被术语处理器1208统称为“目标设备”。对于对接,可以遵照如下序列:Now consider operation in a system using a latch, actuator driven docking. This is the type of system that is most widely used today. The basic two-point docking device as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,589,815 can be generalized to include three One or four sets of guide pins 912, guide pin apertures 912a and cord drives. Such two-, three- and four-set mating members are widely used in the industry for this purpose. Although such devices may be manually actuated by the operator by applying force to the docking handle 914, other types of docking actuators including electric motors, electric or gas linear actuators, and/or vacuum operated devices are also known. . In general, the test head 100 will interface with a plug-in device handler, wafer inspector, or possibly other devices, which are collectively referred to by the term processor 1208 as "target devices." For docking, the following sequence can be followed:

如图15(m)所示,系统已作好把测试头或负载100从与目标设备分离的开始点移动到准备对接位置的准备。As shown in Figure 15(m), the system is ready to move the test head or load 100 from the initial point of separation from the target device to the ready-to-dock position.

a.如步骤1620所示,水平(内外、左右、和横滚)轴上的柔顺驱动器和/或BCAA进入柔顺准备状态,并锁住它们的锁定器118。a. As shown in step 1620, the compliance actuators and/or BCAAs on the horizontal (in-out, side-to-side, and roll) axes enter a compliance-ready state and lock their locks 118 .

b.如步骤1621所示,使俯仰和横摆BCAA进入柔顺准备状态,并锁住它们的锁定器118。b. As shown in step 1621, put pitch and roll BCAA into compliance ready state and lock their locks 118 .

c.如步骤1622所示,垂直驱动机构内的BCAA进入柔顺准备状态(利用柔顺准备序列),并解开它的锁定器118。c. As shown in step 1622, the BCAA in the vertical drive mechanism enters the compliance ready state (using the compliance ready sequence) and unlocks its lock 118 .

d.如步骤1623所示,现在把测试头或负载100移动到准备与目标设备对接的位置。为此,控制器控制致动器以沿着运动路径移动测试头100,使它进入准备对接位置。一般说来,这是对接件的两个半部中的对准机构已经进入非常接近的地方或初始触点,但还没有完全接合的位置。例如,在具有导销912的许多种对接件中,这是对接导销912已经接近目标设备中的它们配合的对接导销小孔912a或正好与目标设备中的它们配合的对接导销小孔912a接合的位置。控制器可以利用一些算法来实现它,或者,操作者通过将按钮、操纵杆、和/或其它适用输入器件用于控制器来引导这个过程。d. As shown in step 1623, the test head or load 100 is now moved to a position ready for docking with the target device. To this end, the controller controls the actuators to move the test head 100 along the path of motion into a ready-to-dock position. Generally speaking, this is where the alignment mechanisms in the two halves of the mating piece have come into close proximity or initial contact, but not yet fully engaged. For example, in many types of docking pieces that have guide pins 912, it is that the docking pins 912 are already close to their mating pin apertures 912a in the target device or are just mating with their mating pin apertures in the target device 912a engaged position. The controller may use some algorithm to accomplish this, or the operator may direct the process by using buttons, joysticks, and/or other suitable input devices with the controller.

从准备状态到对接状态,再到完全对接状态From ready to docked to fully docked

e.准备:具有BCAA的操纵器的所有轴都重新达到平衡。如步骤1624所示,依次使每个BCAA达到平衡。使特定的BCAA达到平衡可能扰乱一些其它BCAA的平衡。于是,重复这个过程,直到每个BCAA的力传感器120都指示平衡状态(典型地,这个目的通过叠代3次或更少次数,通常是叠代2次来达到)。e. Preparation: All axes of the manipulator with BCAA are rebalanced. As shown in step 1624, each BCAA is brought to equilibrium in turn. Bringing a particular BCAA into balance may upset the balance of some other BCAAs. This process is then repeated until each of the BCAA's force sensors 120 indicates a state of equilibrium (typically, this is achieved by 3 or fewer iterations, usually 2 iterations).

f.如步骤1625所示,如果压力传感器包含在BCAA的任何一个中,那么,通过控制器读出当前压力,将其存储在控制器存储器中,供以后使用。f. As shown in step 1625, if a pressure sensor is included in any of the BCAAs, then the current pressure is read by the controller and stored in controller memory for later use.

g.如步骤1626所示,把所有锁定器118都解开,允许沿着所有轴作平衡柔顺运动(注意,正如授予Holt等人的美国专利申请09/646,072所述的那样,通过设计,每当电机未致动且横滚轴没有受到驱动时,横滚轴电机的离合器自动脱开)。现在,测试头100或负载处在平衡柔顺状态,可以由外部装置利用通常小于25到30磅的力移动它。g. Unlock all locks 118 as shown in step 1626, allowing balanced compliant motion along all axes (note that, by design, each When the motor is not activated and the roll axis is not being driven, the clutch of the roll axis motor is automatically disengaged). Now, the test head 100 or load is in a balanced compliant state and can be moved by an external device with typically less than 25 to 30 pounds of force.

h.把测试头100进一步移动到准备驱动位置。这是通常小于1英寸的整个运动,并且,该移动可以并通常手工完成。但是,在更复杂的系统中,控制器(未示出)可以用于迫使测试头100进入这个准备驱动位置。为此,控制器迫使测试头100沿着与处理器(或其它目标器件)电气接口1228的平面垂直的直线路径移动。选择用于运动的一根或数根适当的轴(对于水平对接,垂直轴;对于垂直面对接,内外轴或左右轴;或对于倾斜对接,垂直轴和内外轴或左右轴的组合),锁定器118锁住,并且致动器用于迫使测试头100进入位置,由此,再次解开锁定器118(让其它轴保持在解开状态,以允许作必要的柔顺运动,如上所述,这使测试头能够对准)。h. Move the test head 100 further to the ready-to-drive position. This is an overall movement that is usually less than 1 inch, and this movement can and is usually done by hand. However, in more complex systems, a controller (not shown) may be used to force test head 100 into this ready-to-drive position. To do this, the controller forces the test head 100 to move along a straight path perpendicular to the plane of the processor (or other target device) electrical interface 1228 . select the appropriate axis or axes for motion (vertical axis for horizontal butt joints; in-out or left-right for vertical joints; or a combination of vertical and in-out or left-right for inclined butt joints), The lock 118 is locked and the actuator is used to force the test head 100 into position, thereby unlocking the lock 118 again (leaving the other shafts unlocked to allow the necessary compliant movement, as described above, this to enable alignment of the test head).

i.如步骤1628所示,现在启动对接致动器,把测试头100拖入与目标设备1201的完全对准位置。在如图9(a)所示的对接设备那样的手工驱动对接件中,这通过把力施加在对接把柄914上来实现,把力施加在对接把柄914上使图9(a)中的对接凸轮910或图12(a)中的绳索驱动器(单元914的一部分)旋转起来。在具有动力致动器的对接件中,这通过向致动器适当供能来实现。随着测试头100被拖入最后对接位置中,它在所有六个空间自由度中自由地作柔顺运动。如果需要,尽管这不总是优选的,但是所选轴可以使它们的锁定器118接合,以限制相应自由度中的柔顺运动。i. The docking actuator is now activated, drawing the test head 100 into full alignment with the target device 1201, as shown in step 1628. In a manually actuated docking piece such as the docking device shown in Figure 9(a), this is accomplished by applying a force to the docking handle 914 which causes the docking cam in Figure 9(a) to 910 or the rope drive (part of unit 914) in Figure 12(a) is rotated. In docks with powered actuators, this is achieved by appropriately energizing the actuators. As the test head 100 is drawn into the final docked position, it is free to compliantly move in all six spatial degrees of freedom. If desired, although this is not always preferred, selected axes may have their locks 118 engaged to restrict compliant motion in the respective degrees of freedom.

通常,把对接机构设计成这样的,测试头100被有效地锁闩在对接致动器已经到达它完全对接极限时的地方。于是,测试头100现在完全对接,被锁闩在位置上,并在机械方面已作好测试器件的准备。Typically, the docking mechanism is designed such that the test head 100 is effectively latched in place when the docking actuator has reached its fully docked limit. Thus, the test head 100 is now fully docked, latched in place, and mechanically ready to test the device.

现在考虑使用非锁闩对接的操纵器驱动系统中的操作。在这样的系统中,操纵器必须克服与对接相关的力。这些力通常起因于压缩数百个或数千个装有弹簧的pogo引脚的需要和/或耦合电连接器中数百个或数千个配合触点的需要。对于每一个这样需要几克或几盎司力的pogo引脚或触点,常常会遇到几百磅的总对接力。对于操纵器驱动对接,用在对接中的操纵器驱动机构必须能够克服对接力,以及在自由空间中移动测试头或负载100所需的力。如果使驱动轴保持平衡,那么,就可以减小驱动力。Now consider operation in a manipulator-driven system with non-latch docking. In such systems, the manipulator must overcome the forces associated with docking. These forces typically result from the need to compress hundreds or thousands of spring-loaded pogo pins and/or to couple hundreds or thousands of mating contacts in an electrical connector. For each such pogo pin or contact requiring a few grams or ounces of force, a total mating force of several hundred pounds is often encountered. For manipulator driven docking, the manipulator drive mechanism used in the docking must be able to overcome the docking forces, as well as the forces required to move the test head or load 100 in free space. If the drive shaft is balanced, then the drive force can be reduced.

在轴中使用在操纵器驱动对接过程中为驱动轴的BCAA机构是有利的。首先,通常可以容易地把驱动轴的致动器的尺寸调整成具有足够的驱动能力来克服对接力,以及移动移动测试头或负载100所需的力。此外,如果所考虑的轴被设计成可以在锁定器118解开的平衡状态下移动它,那么,相对位置传感器可以用于检测是否遭遇到障碍物或阻碍物(例如,参阅对图10(a)到10(f)的讨论)。另外,在锁定器118锁住状态移动测试头100的情况下,力传感器120可以用于检测是否遭遇到阻碍物和障碍物。It is advantageous to use a BCAA mechanism in the shaft that is the drive shaft during manipulator driven docking. First, the drive shaft actuator can generally be easily sized to have sufficient drive capacity to overcome the docking force, and the force required to move the test head or load 100 . Furthermore, if the shaft under consideration is designed to move it in equilibrium with the lock 118 disengaged, then a relative position sensor can be used to detect whether an obstacle or obstacle is encountered (see, for example, the reference to Fig. 10(a ) to the discussion in 10(f)). In addition, the force sensor 120 may be used to detect obstacles and obstructions encountered while the test head 100 is being moved in the locked state of the lock 118 .

回忆一下,在致动器驱动对接中,通常,对接设备在一侧配有导销912,在另一侧配有配合导孔912a,以便引导测试头100与器件处理器(图12(a)中的1208)或检测器的测试点对准。倘若导销912有足够的长度且导孔912a有足够的深度,配合到两个密配导孔912a中的两个导销912将在五个空间自由度中提供对准。如果对接表面是平面,这些自由度包括平面内的X、Y和θ和相对于平面的俯仰和横滚。其余自由度是受对接致动器机构控制的两个平面之间的垂直距离。这种技术也可以用在操纵器驱动对接中;但是,其它技术也是已知的,譬如,在前面讨论的[Graham等人]中公开的那种技术。Recall that in actuator-driven docking, typically, the docking device is provided with guide pins 912 on one side and mating guide holes 912a on the other side to guide the test head 100 to the device handler (FIG. 12(a) 1208 in ) or the test point alignment of the detector. Two guide pins 912 fitted into two snug guide holes 912a will provide alignment in five spatial degrees of freedom, provided the guide pins 912 are of sufficient length and the guide holes 912a are of sufficient depth. If the mating surface is planar, these degrees of freedom include X, Y, and θ in-plane and pitch and roll relative to the plane. The remaining degrees of freedom are the vertical distances between the two planes controlled by the docking actuator mechanism. This technique can also be used in manipulator-driven docking; however, other techniques are known, such as that disclosed in [Graham et al.] discussed above.

下面概括有关操纵器驱动对接的过程,这个过程显示在图15(n)所示的流程图中。这个过程遵循前面致动器驱动对接过程的一般形式。The following outlines the procedure for manipulator-driven docking, which is shown in the flowchart shown in Fig. 15(n). This process follows the general form of the previous actuator-driven docking process.

1)系统已作好把测试头或负载100从与目标设备分离的开始点移动到准备对接位置的准备。1) The system is ready to move the test head or load 100 from the starting point of separation from the target device to the ready-to-dock position.

a)如步骤1630所示,使水平(内外、左右、和横滚)轴上的柔顺驱动器和/或BCAA进入柔顺准备状态,并锁住它们的锁定器118。a) As shown in step 1630, make the compliance actuators and/or BCAAs on the horizontal (in-out, side-to-side, and roll) axes into a compliance-ready state and lock their lockers 118 .

b)如步骤1631所示,使俯仰和横摆BCAA进入柔顺准备状态,并锁住它们的锁定器118。b) As shown in step 1631, put pitch and roll BCAA into compliance ready state and lock their lockers 118.

c)如步骤1632所示,使垂直驱动机构上的BCAA进入柔顺准备状态(利用柔顺准备序列),并解开它的锁定器118。c) As shown in step 1632, put the BCAA on the vertical drive mechanism into a compliant ready state (using the compliant ready sequence) and unlock its lock 118 .

2)如步骤1633所示,现在把测试头或负载100移动到准备与目标设备对接的位置。为此,控制器控制致动器沿着运动路径移动测试头100,使它进入准备对接位置,其中,两个半部的对接设备已经接近它们的配合物或刚好与它们的配合物接合。控制器可以利用一些算法来实现它,或者,操作者通过将按钮、操纵杆、和/或其它适用输入器件应用于控制器来引导这个过程。2) As shown in step 1633, the test head or load 100 is now moved to a position ready for docking with the target device. To this end, the controller controls the actuators to move the test head 100 along the path of motion into a ready-to-dock position wherein the two halves of the docking device are already close to or just engaged with their counterparts. The controller may use some algorithm to do this, or the operator may direct the process by applying buttons, joysticks, and/or other suitable input devices to the controller.

3)从准备状态到对接状态,再到完全对接状态3) From ready state to docked state to fully docked state

a)准备:使具有BCAA的操纵器的所有轴都重新达到平衡。如步骤1634所示,依次使每个BCAA达到平衡。使特定的BCAA达到平衡可能扰乱一些其它BCAA的平衡。于是,重复这个过程,直到每个BCAA的力传感器120都指示平衡状态(典型地,这个目的通过叠代3次或更少次数,通常是叠代2次来达到)。a) Preparation: Rebalance all axes of the manipulator with BCAA. As shown in step 1634, each BCAA is brought to equilibrium in turn. Bringing a particular BCAA into balance may upset the balance of some other BCAAs. This process is then repeated until each of the BCAA's force sensors 120 indicates a state of equilibrium (typically, this is achieved by 3 or fewer iterations, usually 2 iterations).

b)如步骤1635所示,如果压力传感器包含在BCAA的任何一个中,那么,通过控制器读出当前压力,将其存储在控制器存储器中,供以后使用。b) As shown in step 1635, if a pressure sensor is included in any of the BCAAs, then the current pressure is read by the controller and stored in controller memory for later use.

c)如步骤1636所示,确定将受到驱动和控制的轴。这些可以在专门设备中通过设计预先确定,但是,在一般情况下,正在将测试头100与之对接的设备将确定它们。通常,所选轴至少实现沿着与处理器或检测器的对接平面垂直的路径的移动,处理器或检测器的对接平面可以是水平的、垂直的、或与水平面成某一角度的倾斜的。在某些应用中,可以驱动和控制使被带到一起的两个表面的平面化得以实现的轴是理想的。c) As shown in step 1636, the axes to be driven and controlled are determined. These may be predetermined by design in the specific equipment, but, in general, the equipment with which the test head 100 is being interfaced will determine them. Typically, the selected axis at least effects movement along a path perpendicular to the processor or detector interface plane, which may be horizontal, vertical, or inclined at an angle to the horizontal . In some applications, an axis that can be driven and controlled to enable planarization of two surfaces brought together is desirable.

d)如步骤1637所示,将在非驱动和非控制轴中的锁定器118统统解开,以便在移动到完全对接位置的同时,允许沿着这些轴作平衡柔顺运动。将受到驱动和控制的轴的锁定器118保持在锁定状态(请注意,正如授予Holt等人的美国专利申请09/646,072所述的那样,通过设计,每当不驱动电机和横滚轴未受到驱动时,使横滚轴电机的离合器自动脱开。还请注意,如果横滚轴要作为对接运动的一部分而受到驱动,那么,需要配有如上所述实现非转矩限制操作的装置)。现在,测试头或负载100处在平衡柔顺状态。d) As shown in step 1637, the lockers 118 in the non-drive and non-control axes are all released to allow balanced compliant movement along these axes while moving to the fully docked position. Holds the lock 118 of the axis being driven and controlled in the locked state (note that, as described in U.S. Patent Application 09/646,072 to Holt et al., by design, whenever the motor is not driven and the roll axis is not When driven, the clutch of the roll axis motor is automatically disengaged. Note also that if the roll axis is to be driven as part of a docking motion, it will need to be equipped with means for non-torque limited operation as described above). Now, the test head or load 100 is in a balanced compliance state.

e)如步骤1638所示,测试头100进一步移动到传感器确定的初步对准位置和/或把逐渐变细的导销912部分插入导销插孔912a之中。这样,测试头100在千分之几英寸内和在大约1度共面性内与目标设备对准。这是通常小于1英寸的总体运动,并且,在操纵器驱动系统中,通常利用控制器进行移动,迫使测试头100进入这个初步对准位置。为此,控制器迫使测试头100沿着与目标设备中对接区的平面相垂直的直线路径移动。如果在这个步骤中使用了除了上面在步骤2)c)中选择的轴之外的轴,那么,必须在移动之前锁住它们,并在移动之后再次解开它们(使其它轴保持在解开状态,以允许必要的柔顺性)。e) As shown in step 1638, the test head 100 is further moved to the preliminary alignment position determined by the sensor and/or the tapered guide pin 912 is partially inserted into the guide pin receptacle 912a. In this way, test head 100 is aligned with the target device to within a few thousandths of an inch and within approximately 1 degree of coplanarity. This is an overall movement that is typically less than 1 inch, and, in a manipulator drive system, typically moves with a controller to force the test head 100 into this preliminary alignment position. To this end, the controller forces the test head 100 to move along a straight path perpendicular to the plane of the docking zone in the target device. If axes other than those selected above in step 2)c) are used in this step, then they must be locked before the move and unlocked again after the move (leaving the other axes unlocked state to allow the necessary compliance).

f)如步骤1639所示,把测试头100驱动到与目标设备的完全对接位置。上面在步骤1636中选择的轴受系统控制器驱动和控制,使测试头100沿着适当路径移动到它的完全对接位置。随着测试头100被驱动到最后对接位置,它可以在所有的非选轴中自由地作柔顺运动。但是,如果需要,某些非选轴可以使它们的锁定器118接合以限制在相应自由度内的柔顺运动;但是,一般说来,这不是优选的操作模式。当发生这种运动时,监视适当的位置传感器。当测试头已经到达它的完全对接位置时,至少需要一个或多个位置传感器发出信号。倘若在这个过程中适当的轴受到驱动和控制,随着测试头100被移动到对接位置,在必要的时候,可以使用其它传感器来保持和提高测试头100的对准和平面化。f) As shown in step 1639, the test head 100 is driven to a fully docked position with the target device. The axes selected above in step 1636 are driven and controlled by the system controller to move the test head 100 along the appropriate path to its fully docked position. As the test head 100 is driven to the final docking position, it is free to make compliant movements in all non-selected axes. However, some non-selectable axes may have their locks 118 engaged to restrict compliant motion within the respective degrees of freedom, if desired; however, in general, this is not the preferred mode of operation. When this movement occurs, monitor the appropriate position sensors. At least one or more position sensors are required to signal when the test head has reached its fully docked position. Provided the appropriate axes are driven and controlled during this process, other sensors may be used to maintain and improve the alignment and planarization of the test head 100 as necessary as the test head 100 is moved into the docked position.

4)如步骤1640所示,当测试头100完全对接时,使驱动轴(上面在步骤1636中选择的)停止和保持在完全对接状态。除非在对接硬件中配备了锁闩机构以测试头100保持在它的对接位置,则在测试头100的随后测试和使用期间,它们必须保持在这个状态。这样的锁闩器可以由控制器来控制并在表示已经到达对接位置的信号时致动。4) As shown in step 1640, when the test head 100 is fully docked, the drive shaft (selected above in step 1636) is stopped and held in the fully docked state. Unless a latch mechanism is provided in the docking hardware to keep the test head 100 in its docked position, they must remain in this state during subsequent testing and use of the test head 100 . Such a latch may be controlled by a controller and activated upon a signal indicating that the docked position has been reached.

将测试头保持在与测试头设备的对接位置的可替换技术包括锁住或不锁住一些或全部操纵器运动轴。另外的技术是通过监视和保持BCAA的缸128中的压力来保持测试头100的平衡状态。Alternative techniques for maintaining the test head in a docked position with the test head apparatus include locking or unlocking some or all of the manipulator motion axes. Another technique is to maintain the equilibrium state of the test head 100 by monitoring and maintaining the pressure in the cylinder 128 of the BCAA.

在对接方法中,在每种情况下都要识别测试头100的两个中间位置:在两种情况中的准备对接位置、和在致动器驱动对接中的准备驱动位置和在操纵器驱动对接中的相应初步对准位置。在某些情况下,两个中间位置可以是同一个。此外,在某些对接中,机构捕获器可以用于捕获测试头100和使测试头保持在这些中间位置之一或两者中。当这些捕获器被启动时,它们防止测试头100离开为对接位置而获得的对接位置,而是使它移动到对接位置附近。使用这些方法扩大了上述方法,而不是创造了新方法。In the docking method, two intermediate positions of the test head 100 are identified in each case: the ready-to-dock position in both cases, and the ready-to-drive position in actuator-driven docking and the ready-to-drive position in manipulator-driven docking. The corresponding preliminary alignment positions in . In some cases, the two intermediate positions can be the same. Additionally, in certain dockings, a mechanism catch may be used to capture the test head 100 and hold the test head in either or both of these intermediate positions. When these catches are activated, they prevent the test head 100 from leaving the docked position obtained for the docked position, but instead cause it to move close to the docked position. Using these methods augments the methods above, rather than creating new ones.

虽然已经对本发明的优选实施例进行了图示和描述,但是,应该明白,这样的实施例只是通过举例来提供的。对于本领域的普通技术人员来说,可以作出许许多多变型、改变和替换,而不偏离本发明的精神。因此,我们认为,所附权利要求书涵盖落在本发明的精神和范围之内的所有这样的变型。While preferred embodiments of the present invention have been illustrated and described, it should be understood that such embodiments are provided by way of example only. Numerous variations, changes and substitutions may be made by those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit of the invention. Accordingly, we consider the appended claims to cover all such modifications as fall within the spirit and scope of the invention.

Claims (31)

1.一种用于支承负载的设备,包括:1. An apparatus for supporting a load comprising: 力传感器,用于检测从所述负载接收的力,所述力来源于处在不平衡状态、使得绕着所述负载的转轴产生转矩的所述负载;a force sensor for detecting a force received from said load originating from said load in an unbalanced state such that a torque is generated about a rotational axis of said load; 力源,用于响应所述力传感器检测的所述力,提供相对于所述负载并在与所述力相反的方向上的反力。A force source for providing a counter force relative to the load in a direction opposite to the force in response to the force detected by the force sensor. 2.如权利要求1所述的设备,还包括锁定器,当所述力传感器正在检测所述力时且当所述锁定器处在锁定状态时,所述锁定器保持所述负载的位置。2. The apparatus of claim 1, further comprising a lock that maintains the position of the load when the force sensor is detecting the force and when the lock is in a locked state. 3.如权利要求1所述的设备,其中,当所述负载相对于所述轴保持平衡时且当所述锁定器处在解开状态时,所述力源向所述负载提供运动的柔顺范围。3. The apparatus of claim 1 , wherein said force source provides compliance of motion to said load when said load is in balance with respect to said shaft and when said lock is in an disengaged state. scope. 4.一种平衡负载的设备,所述负载处在不平衡状态,使得绕着所述负载的转轴产生转矩,所述设备包括:4. An apparatus for balancing a load which is out of balance such that a torque is generated about an axis of rotation of the load, said apparatus comprising: 力传感器,用于测量由于所述负载不平衡而所述负载施加在所述力传感器上的力的大小;以及a force sensor for measuring the amount of force exerted by the load on the force sensor due to the load imbalance; and 力生成器,用于生成相对于所述负载并在与所述力相反方向上的反力,来抵消所述力。A force generator for generating a reaction force relative to the load and in a direction opposite to the force to counteract the force. 5.如权利要求4所述的设备,还包括锁定器,当所述力传感器正在测量所述力的大小时且当所述锁定器处在锁定状态时,所述锁定器保持所述负载的位置。5. The apparatus of claim 4, further comprising a lock that holds the load in place when the force sensor is measuring the magnitude of the force and when the lock is in a locked state. Location. 6.如权利要求5所述的设备,其中,当所述负载关于所述轴平衡时且当所述锁定器处在解开状态时,所述力生成器向所述负载提供运动的柔顺范围。6. The apparatus of claim 5, wherein the force generator provides a compliant range of motion to the load when the load is balanced about the shaft and when the lock is in the disengaged state . 7.一种使负载绕着一根轴保持平衡的方法,所述方法包括如下步骤:7. A method of balancing a load about an axis, said method comprising the steps of: 测量由于所述负载不平衡而所述负载施加的力的至少一部分;以及measuring at least a portion of the force exerted by the load due to the load imbalance; and 施加相对于所述负载并在与所述力相反方向上的反力,以抵消所述力,从而使所述负载比施加所述反力之前更接近平衡状态。A counter force is applied relative to the load and in an opposite direction to the force to counteract the force so that the load is closer to equilibrium than before the counter force was applied. 8.如权利要求7所述的方法,还包括如下步骤:8. The method of claim 7, further comprising the steps of: 在所述测量步骤期间,把所述负载锁定在某一位置上。During the measuring step, the load is locked in position. 9.一种支承负载的设备,所述设备包括:9. An apparatus for supporting a load, said apparatus comprising: 力传感器,用于检测从所述负载接收的力,所述力源于所述负载相对于所述负载的轴不平衡;a force sensor for detecting a force received from the load resulting from an imbalance of the load relative to the load's axis; 力源,用于响应所述力传感器检测的所述力,提供相对于所述负载并在与所述力相反方向上的的反力;a force source for providing a reaction force relative to the load and in a direction opposite to the force in response to the force detected by the force sensor; 柔顺单元,用于向所述负载提供相对于所述轴的运动范围,所述柔顺单元包括锁定器,当所述锁定器处在锁定状态时,所述锁定器固定所述锁定器在所述运动范围内的位置;以及a compliant unit for providing the load with a range of motion relative to the shaft, the compliant unit including a lock that secures the lock in the locked state when the lock is in a locked state position within range of motion; and 与所述柔顺单元耦合的驱动单元,用于在所述锁定器处于所述锁定状态时,沿着所述轴的方向驱动所述负载。A drive unit coupled with the compliance unit is used to drive the load along the direction of the shaft when the locker is in the locked state. 10.如权利要求9所述的设备,其中,当所述锁定器处在解开状态时,所述锁定器在所述运动范围内的位置可随所述驱动单元驱动所述锁定器而改变。10. The apparatus according to claim 9, wherein when the locker is in an unlocked state, the position of the locker within the range of motion is changeable as the drive unit drives the locker . 11.如权利要求9所述的设备,其中,所述负载的所述轴是转轴。11. The apparatus of claim 9, wherein said axis of said load is a rotational axis. 12.如权利要求9所述的设备,其中,所述柔顺单元包括在所述运动范围的每一端上的止动器,所述锁定器处在所述止动器之间。12. The apparatus of claim 9, wherein the compliance unit includes stops at each end of the range of motion, the lock being between the stops. 13.如权利要求12所述的设备,其中,当所述锁定器与所述止动器之一接触时,所述驱动单元在所述锁定器处在解开状态情况下沿所述轴的方向驱动所述负载。13. The apparatus as claimed in claim 12, wherein, when the locker is in contact with one of the stoppers, the drive unit moves along the shaft with the locker in the disengaged state. direction to drive the load. 14.如权利要求9所述的设备,其中,向所述驱动单元供能。14. The apparatus of claim 9, wherein the drive unit is powered. 15.一种支承负载的设备,所述设备包括:15. An apparatus for supporting a load, said apparatus comprising: 力传感器,用于检测从所述负载接收的力,所述力源于所述负载相对于所述负载的轴不平衡;a force sensor for detecting a force received from the load resulting from an imbalance of the load relative to the load's axis; 力源,用于响应所述力传感器检测的所述力,提供相对于所述负载并在与所述力相反方向上的的反力;a force source for providing a reaction force relative to the load and in a direction opposite to the force in response to the force detected by the force sensor; 柔顺单元,用于为所述负载提供相对于所述轴的运动范围;以及a compliant unit for providing the load with a range of motion relative to the shaft; and 与所述力源无关地受到控制的驱动单元,所述驱动单元与所述柔顺单元耦合,用于沿着所述轴的方向驱动所述负载。A drive unit controlled independently of the force source, coupled to the compliance unit, for driving the load in the direction of the axis. 16.如权利要求15所述的设备,其中,所述轴是转轴。16. The apparatus of claim 15, wherein the shaft is a rotating shaft. 17.如权利要求15所述的设备,还包括:17. The device of claim 15, further comprising: 锁定器,用于当所述锁定器处在锁定状态时,固定所示运动范围所处的位置。The locking device is used for fixing the position of the range of motion shown when the locking device is in a locked state. 18.如权利要求15所述的设备,其中,所述柔顺单元包括在所述运动范围的每一端上的止动器。18. The apparatus of claim 15, wherein the compliance unit includes a stop at each end of the range of motion. 19.如权利要求15所述的设备,其中,向所述驱动单元供能。19. The apparatus of claim 15, wherein the drive unit is powered. 20.一种沿某一方向支承负载的设备,所述设备包括:20. An apparatus for supporting a load in a direction, said apparatus comprising: 力传感器,用于检测沿所述方向的力,所述力源于沿所述方向驱使的所述负载;a force sensor for detecting a force in said direction resulting from said load being driven in said direction; 力源,用于响应所述力传感器检测的所述力,提供相对于所述负载并在与所述力相反方向上的反力;a force source for providing a reaction force relative to the load and in a direction opposite to the force in response to the force detected by the force sensor; 柔顺单元,用于沿所述方向向所述负载提供运动范围,所述柔顺单元包括锁定器,当所述锁定器处在锁定状态时,所述锁定器固定所述锁定器在所述运动范围内的位置;以及a compliant unit for providing a range of motion to the load in the direction, the compliant unit including a lock that fixes the lock in the range of motion when the lock is in a locked state within the location; and 与所述柔顺单元耦合的、与所述力源无关地受到控制的驱动单元,用于当所述锁定器处在所述锁定状态时,沿着所述方向驱动所述负载。A drive unit coupled to the compliance unit and controlled independently of the force source for driving the load in the direction when the locker is in the locked state. 21.如权利要求20所述的设备,其中,当所述锁定器处在解开状态时,所述锁定器在所述运动范围内的所述位置可由于所述驱动单元驱动所述锁定器而改变。21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein said position of said lock within said range of motion is actuatable by said drive unit when said lock is in an unlocked state. And change. 22.如权利要求20所述的设备,其中,当所述锁定器处在解开状态时且当所述负载沿着所述方向基本上无重量时,所述锁定器在所述运动范围内的所述位置可通过所述驱动单元驱动所述锁定器而改变。22. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the lock is within the range of motion when the lock is in the disengaged state and when the load is substantially weightless in the direction The position of can be changed by driving the locker by the drive unit. 23.如权利要求20所述的设备,其中,所述柔顺单元包括在所述运动范围的每一端上的止动器。23. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the compliance unit includes a stop at each end of the range of motion. 24.如权利要求20所述的设备,其中,向所述驱动单元供能。24. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the drive unit is powered. 25.一种沿着垂直方向操纵负载的设备,所述设备包括:25. An apparatus for manipulating a load in a vertical direction, the apparatus comprising: 力传感器,用于检测沿着所述垂直方向的力,所述力来源于沿着所述方向驱使的所述负载;a force sensor for detecting a force along said vertical direction resulting from said load being driven along said direction; 力源,用于响应所述力传感器检测的所述力,提供相对于所述负载并在与所述力相反方向上的的反力;a force source for providing a reaction force relative to the load and in a direction opposite to the force in response to the force detected by the force sensor; 柔顺单元,用于沿所述垂直方向向所述负载提供运动范围,所述柔顺单元包括锁定器,当所述锁定器处在锁定状态时,所述锁定器固定所述锁定器在所述运动范围内的位置;以及a compliant unit for providing a range of motion to the load in the vertical direction, the compliant unit comprising a locker, when the locker is in a locked state, the locker fixes the locker during the movement location within range; and 与所述力源无关地受到控制的驱动单元,用于当所述锁定器处在所述锁定状态时,沿着所述垂直方向驱动所述负载。A drive unit controlled independently of the force source for driving the load in the vertical direction when the locker is in the locked state. 26.如权利要求25所述的设备,其中,所述柔顺单元包括在所述运动范围的每一端上的止动器。所述锁定器处在所述止动器之间。26. The apparatus of claim 25, wherein the compliance unit includes a stop at each end of the range of motion. The locker is between the detents. 27.如权利要求26所述的设备,其中,当所述锁定器与所述止动器之一接触时,所述驱动单元在所述锁定器处在解开状态情况下沿所述垂直方向驱动所述负载。27. The apparatus according to claim 26, wherein, when the locker is in contact with one of the stoppers, the drive unit moves in the vertical direction with the locker in the disengaged state. drive the load. 28.如权利要求25所述的设备,其中,向所述驱动单元供能。28. The apparatus of claim 25, wherein the drive unit is powered. 29.一种将固定在测试头操纵器中的电子测试头与电子器件处理器对接的方法,所述方法包括如下步骤:29. A method of interfacing an electronic test head secured in a test head manipulator with an electronic device processor, the method comprising the steps of: 测量沿着或绕所述测试头操纵器的多根运动轴的至少一根的不平衡力的大小;以及measuring the magnitude of an unbalanced force along or about at least one of a plurality of axes of motion of the test head manipulator; and 为所述不平衡力提供在与所述不平衡力相反方向上的反力,直到所述不平衡力基本上是零为止。A counter force in a direction opposite to the unbalanced force is provided for the unbalanced force until the unbalanced force is substantially zero. 30.一种将电子测试头与电子器件处理器对接的方法,所述方法包括如下步骤:30. A method of interfacing an electronic test head with an electronic device processor, the method comprising the steps of: 测量沿着或绕所述测试头操纵器的多根运动轴的至少一根的不平衡力的大小;measuring a magnitude of an unbalanced force along or about at least one of a plurality of axes of motion of the test head manipulator; 向所述不平衡力提供在与所述不平衡力相反方向上的反力,直到所述不平衡力基本上是零为止;以及providing a reaction force to the unbalanced force in a direction opposite to the unbalanced force until the unbalanced force is substantially zero; and 在施加所述反力的同时,把所述测试头移向相对于所述器件处理器的对接位置。While applying the counter force, the test head is moved toward a docked position relative to the device handler. 31.一种将固定在测试头操纵器中的电子测试头与电子器件处理器对接的方法,所述方法包括如下步骤:31. A method of interfacing an electronic test head secured in a test head manipulator with an electronic device processor, the method comprising the steps of: 测量沿着或绕所述测试头操纵器的多根运动轴的至少一根的不平衡力的大小;measuring a magnitude of an unbalanced force along or about at least one of a plurality of axes of motion of the test head manipulator; 为所述不平衡力提供在与所述不平衡力相反方向上的反力,直到所述不平衡力基本上是零为止;以及providing said unbalanced force with a reaction force in a direction opposite to said unbalanced force until said unbalanced force is substantially zero; and 在施加所述反力的同时,将所述测试头移向相对于所述器件处理器的对接位置上。While applying the counter force, the test head is moved toward a docked position relative to the device handler.
CNB018192637A 2000-09-22 2001-09-20 Manipulator for a test head with active compliance Expired - Fee Related CN1306277C (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US23459800P 2000-09-22 2000-09-22
US60/234,598 2000-09-22
US30122801P 2001-06-27 2001-06-27
US60/301,228 2001-06-27
PCT/US2001/029530 WO2002025292A2 (en) 2000-09-22 2001-09-20 Manipulator for a test head with active compliance

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN200910252632A Division CN101788643A (en) 2000-09-22 2001-09-20 Manipulator for a test head with active compliance
CN200710007714A Division CN100582786C (en) 2000-09-22 2001-09-20 Manipulator for a test head with active compliance

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN1484767A CN1484767A (en) 2004-03-24
CN1306277C true CN1306277C (en) 2007-03-21

Family

ID=26928107

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN200910252632A Pending CN101788643A (en) 2000-09-22 2001-09-20 Manipulator for a test head with active compliance
CNB018192637A Expired - Fee Related CN1306277C (en) 2000-09-22 2001-09-20 Manipulator for a test head with active compliance

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN200910252632A Pending CN101788643A (en) 2000-09-22 2001-09-20 Manipulator for a test head with active compliance

Country Status (11)

Country Link
US (2) US7084358B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1322965B1 (en)
JP (1) JP2004523729A (en)
KR (1) KR20030043966A (en)
CN (2) CN101788643A (en)
AT (1) ATE338952T1 (en)
AU (1) AU2001291171A1 (en)
DE (2) DE60122911T2 (en)
MY (2) MY127154A (en)
TW (1) TW515893B (en)
WO (1) WO2002025292A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (34)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN100383534C (en) * 2002-10-02 2008-04-23 因泰斯特Ip公司 Test head positioning device
US7235964B2 (en) * 2003-03-31 2007-06-26 Intest Corporation Test head positioning system and method
EP1947466B1 (en) * 2003-08-06 2012-07-04 inTEST Corporation Test head positioning system
MY146692A (en) * 2003-08-06 2012-09-14 Intest Corp Test head positioning system
DE102004018474A1 (en) * 2004-04-16 2005-11-10 Esmo Ag Heavy duty manipulator especially for testing ICs has a movable tower mounted on a support platform and with integral damping
US7913971B2 (en) * 2005-04-29 2011-03-29 Cameron International Corporation Hydraulic override
US20070099555A1 (en) * 2005-11-03 2007-05-03 Beauchamp Dale A Pneumatic animal confinement house air inlet actuation system and method
DE102005057508B4 (en) * 2005-12-01 2011-11-17 Multitest Elektronische Systeme Gmbh Docking device for coupling a handling device with a test head for electronic components
US7598725B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2009-10-06 Teradyne, Inc. Alignment receptacle of a sensor adapted to interact with a pin to generate position data along at least two transverse axes for docking a test head
TWI439709B (en) * 2006-12-29 2014-06-01 Intest Corp Manupulator and load positioning system for translating load along axis of translation
EP2104862B1 (en) * 2006-12-29 2012-08-08 inTEST Corporation Test head positioning system and method
US8460256B2 (en) * 2009-07-15 2013-06-11 Allegiance Corporation Collapsible fluid collection and disposal system and related methods
US9889239B2 (en) 2007-03-23 2018-02-13 Allegiance Corporation Fluid collection and disposal system and related methods
AU2008232361B2 (en) 2007-03-23 2013-05-16 Allegiance Corporation Fluid collection and disposal system and related methods
JP5427343B2 (en) * 2007-04-20 2014-02-26 任天堂株式会社 Game controller
EP2150823A4 (en) * 2007-05-07 2016-12-21 Intest Corp ARCEAU AND CABLE HANDLING SYSTEM FOR A TEST HEAD MANIPULATOR
US7602562B2 (en) 2007-05-21 2009-10-13 Electro Scientific Industries, Inc. Fluid counterbalance for a laser lens used to scribe an electronic component substrate
FR2931451B1 (en) * 2008-05-22 2010-12-17 Fmc Technologies Sa CONTROL DEVICE FOR SYSTEM FOR LOADING AND / OR UNLOADING FLUIDS
CN101987448B (en) * 2009-08-07 2012-09-05 坤霖精密有限公司 The Improved Conveyor Arm Overload Mechanism of Automatic Feeder
US8408082B2 (en) * 2009-11-18 2013-04-02 General Electric Company Apparatus to measure fluids in a conduit
US20140317453A1 (en) 2011-07-12 2014-10-23 Intest Corporation Method and apparatus for docking a test head with a peripheral
JP5221719B2 (en) * 2011-08-18 2013-06-26 ファナック株式会社 Positioning device that performs retraction using air balance
DE102014207457A1 (en) 2014-04-08 2015-10-08 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Arrangement, test bench and method for testing a point machine
US9454911B2 (en) * 2014-07-30 2016-09-27 The Boeing Company Flight control test simulator system and method
US9506961B2 (en) 2014-12-04 2016-11-29 Chicony Power Technology Co., Ltd. Power supply detection apparatus and detecting method thereof
US10094854B2 (en) * 2015-10-23 2018-10-09 Teradyne, Inc. Manipulator in automatic test equipment
CN110537074A (en) * 2017-04-19 2019-12-03 瑞尼斯豪公司 Balancing parts for measuring equipment
CN108226647B (en) * 2018-04-13 2024-05-24 南方电网科学研究院有限责任公司 A device for measuring the impedance of a power line access point
CN108548685B (en) * 2018-04-26 2024-08-06 广东产品质量监督检验研究院(国家质量技术监督局广州电气安全检验所、广东省试验认证研究院、华安实验室) Triaxial six-direction test loading method based on robot static flexibility test device
FR3080880B1 (en) * 2018-05-04 2020-09-04 Safran Landing Systems ROTARY LOCKING DEVICE WITH IMPULSE CONTROL
KR102202035B1 (en) * 2020-09-03 2021-01-12 주식회사 프로이천 Auto-Probe Apparatus
TWI737558B (en) * 2020-12-25 2021-08-21 致茂電子股份有限公司 Electronic device testing apparatus capable of autonomously compensating unflatness of contact surface between a test head and a device under test
US11498207B2 (en) 2021-01-08 2022-11-15 Teradyne, Inc. Test head manipulator configured to address uncontrolled test head rotation
CN114325325B (en) * 2021-12-29 2023-12-01 日月新半导体(昆山)有限公司 Apparatus for testing integrated circuit products

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN2279238Y (en) * 1996-10-17 1998-04-22 华南理工大学 Closed current type open-power gearing experimental table
CN1208935A (en) * 1997-07-25 1999-02-24 株式会社爱德万测试 Test head positioner for semiconductor device testing apparatus
US5949002A (en) * 1997-11-12 1999-09-07 Teradyne, Inc. Manipulator for automatic test equipment with active compliance

Family Cites Families (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4705447A (en) * 1983-08-11 1987-11-10 Intest Corporation Electronic test head positioner for test systems
US5149029A (en) * 1982-08-25 1992-09-22 Intest Corporation Electronic test head positioner for test systems
US4527942A (en) * 1982-08-25 1985-07-09 Intest Corporation Electronic test head positioner for test systems
JPS61197079A (en) * 1985-02-28 1986-09-01 Toyota Motor Corp Chipping-resistant coated film and its formation
US4696197A (en) * 1986-04-11 1987-09-29 Lockheed Corporation System for counterbalancing tool mount loads in a machine tool
JP2578084B2 (en) * 1986-11-25 1997-02-05 東京エレクトロン株式会社 Wafer prober
JP2514820B2 (en) * 1986-11-25 1996-07-10 東京エレクトロン 株式会社 Wafer prober
US4893047A (en) * 1988-09-20 1990-01-09 Honda Electronic Co., Ltd. Ultrasonic driving device
JPH0785921B2 (en) * 1991-07-15 1995-09-20 徳寿工業株式会社 Insulation sheet for coating
JP2967798B2 (en) * 1993-12-16 1999-10-25 株式会社東京精密 Wafer prober
US5606262A (en) * 1995-06-07 1997-02-25 Teradyne, Inc. Manipulator for automatic test equipment test head
US6006616A (en) * 1997-07-11 1999-12-28 Credence Systems Corporation Semiconductor tester with power assist for vertical test head movement
MY138984A (en) * 2000-03-01 2009-08-28 Intest Corp Vertical counter balanced test head manipulator
CN100383534C (en) * 2002-10-02 2008-04-23 因泰斯特Ip公司 Test head positioning device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN2279238Y (en) * 1996-10-17 1998-04-22 华南理工大学 Closed current type open-power gearing experimental table
CN1208935A (en) * 1997-07-25 1999-02-24 株式会社爱德万测试 Test head positioner for semiconductor device testing apparatus
US5949002A (en) * 1997-11-12 1999-09-07 Teradyne, Inc. Manipulator for automatic test equipment with active compliance

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN101788643A (en) 2010-07-28
HK1095884A1 (en) 2007-05-18
US20050020402A1 (en) 2005-01-27
MY147595A (en) 2012-12-31
WO2002025292B1 (en) 2003-02-20
JP2004523729A (en) 2004-08-05
WO2002025292A2 (en) 2002-03-28
TW515893B (en) 2003-01-01
DE60122911T2 (en) 2007-02-22
ATE338952T1 (en) 2006-09-15
US7084358B2 (en) 2006-08-01
AU2001291171A1 (en) 2002-04-02
KR20030043966A (en) 2003-06-02
MY127154A (en) 2006-11-30
US20060156836A1 (en) 2006-07-20
EP1322965B1 (en) 2006-09-06
US7340972B2 (en) 2008-03-11
DE06014164T1 (en) 2007-06-06
CN1484767A (en) 2004-03-24
DE60122911D1 (en) 2006-10-19
EP1322965A2 (en) 2003-07-02
WO2002025292A3 (en) 2002-10-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN1306277C (en) Manipulator for a test head with active compliance
CN101038301A (en) Manipulator for a test head with active compliance
CN1623096A (en) Electronic component test device
CN1086332C (en) Device and method for deassembling and assembling combustion turbine
CN1187595C (en) Tensile Strength Tester and Measurement Method
CN1202568C (en) Substrate transfer apparatus
US11408933B2 (en) Manipulator for moving a test head
CN1231179C (en) Static magnetic field control method and magnetic resonance imaging device
TWI771738B (en) A plasma processor, wafer lifting device and lifting method thereof
CN1946521A (en) Multi-point landing type foot support mechanism, biped walking robot equipped with the mechanism, and its control structure
CN1688949A (en) System and process for measuring, compensating and testing numerically controlled machine tool heads and/or tables
CN1812868A (en) CMM arm with exoskeleton
CN1467681A (en) Low cost and easy-to-operate structure for optical information reader
CN1926422A (en) Testing facilities for image sensor
US20140317453A1 (en) Method and apparatus for docking a test head with a peripheral
CN1159645A (en) Method and apparatus for manufacturing information storage device
CN1409316A (en) Magnetic head positioner and information recording and replay device
CN100383534C (en) Test head positioning device
US20230051393A1 (en) Positioning apparatus with an associated transfer mechanism
CN1665626A (en) Slidable boring tool with fine adjustment
CN1154335A (en) Convey apparatus, and movable driving mechanism for movable work apparatus
CN1864339A (en) A sliding opening and closing device and a portable terminal having the same
JPWO2010007652A1 (en) Test head moving device and electronic component testing device
EP1712923B1 (en) Apparatus and method for balancing and for providing a compliant range to a test head
CN221262349U (en) Susceptor adjusting device for semiconductor reaction chamber

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
C06 Publication
PB01 Publication
C10 Entry into substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
C14 Grant of patent or utility model
GR01 Patent grant
CF01 Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee

Granted publication date: 20070321

Termination date: 20160920

CF01 Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee